WO2017194005A1 - Signal transmission method and device, and user equipment - Google Patents

Signal transmission method and device, and user equipment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017194005A1
WO2017194005A1 PCT/CN2017/084176 CN2017084176W WO2017194005A1 WO 2017194005 A1 WO2017194005 A1 WO 2017194005A1 CN 2017084176 W CN2017084176 W CN 2017084176W WO 2017194005 A1 WO2017194005 A1 WO 2017194005A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time domain
srs
transmission
physical layer
srs transmission
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/084176
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨玲
赵亚军
苟伟
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Publication of WO2017194005A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017194005A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to, but is not limited to, the field of communications, and more particularly to a signal transmission method, apparatus, and user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short).
  • User Equipment User Equipment
  • unlicensed spectrum has the following characteristics: free/low cost; low entry requirements, low cost; large available bandwidth; resource sharing;
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • LAA Licensed Assisted Access
  • CSI channel state information
  • the LAA is a natural Time Division Duplex (TDD) carrier
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the LBT Listen Before Talk, LBT for short
  • the downlink CSI also has the characteristics of less measurement opportunities and large delay between measurement and reporting, so that the LAA uplink SRS is a mandatory option. Based on this, the SRS transmission has been studied and discussed in the current Rel-14eLAA.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a signal transmission method, device and user equipment to improve the transmission opportunity of the SRS.
  • a signal transmission method comprising: determining a symbol position for transmitting a sounding reference signal SRS; transmitting the SRS at the determined symbol position; wherein the symbol position is Time domain symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position.
  • a signal transmission apparatus comprising: a first determining module configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting a sounding reference signal SRS; a first transmission module configured to determine The SRS is transmitted at a symbol position; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position.
  • a user equipment UE comprising the apparatus of any of the above.
  • a storage medium is also provided.
  • the storage medium is arranged to store program code for performing the above signal transmission method.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined, and the effect of effectively improving the transmission opportunity of the SRS is achieved.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the hardware structure of a user equipment of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 is a first schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a second schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • the second DCI signaling is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship, and the time domain subframe position and/or SRS transmission time of the SRS transmission is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship.
  • FIG. 7 is a first DCI signaling triggering SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention, and indicating a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to an n+k timing relationship, where the second DCI signaling determines an SRS transmission according to an n+k1 timing relationship.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of introducing a self-delay operation in an LBT mechanism when different UEs configure a time domain symbol position of the same SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a time domain structure in a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of different SRS transmission time domain symbols configured by different UEs in a downlink subframe of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of frequency domain repetition N satisfying ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirements according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of satisfying an ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirement by using a block interleaving method according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram 1 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram 1 of a first determining module 132 in a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 15 is a second structural block diagram of a first determining module 132 in a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 16 is a structural block diagram 2 of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 17 is a block diagram 3 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a user equipment UE 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a hardware structural block diagram of a user equipment of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • user equipment 10 may include one or more (only one shown) processor 102 (processor 102 may include, but is not limited to, a processing device such as a microprocessor MCU or a programmable logic device FPGA)
  • processor 102 may include, but is not limited to, a processing device such as a microprocessor MCU or a programmable logic device FPGA)
  • a memory 104 for storing data
  • a transmission device 106 for communication functions.
  • FIG. 1 is merely illustrative and does not limit the structure of the above electronic device.
  • user device 10 may also include more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 1, or have a different configuration than that shown in FIG.
  • the memory 104 can be configured as a software program and a module for storing application software, such as program instructions/modules corresponding to the signal transmission method in the embodiment of the present invention, and the processor 102 executes each by executing a software program and a module stored in the memory 104.
  • a functional application and data processing, that is, the above method is implemented.
  • Memory 104 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or other non-volatile solid state memory.
  • memory 104 may further include memory remotely located relative to processor 102, which may be connected to user device 10 over a network. Examples of such networks include, but are not limited to, the Internet, intranets, local area networks, mobile communication networks, and combinations thereof.
  • Transmission device 106 is arranged to receive or transmit data via a network.
  • the network instance described above may include a wireless network provided by a communication provider of the user equipment 10.
  • the transmission device 106 includes a Network Interface Controller (NIC) that can be connected to other network devices through a base station to communicate with the Internet.
  • the transmission device 106 can be a Radio Frequency (RF) module configured to communicate with the Internet wirelessly.
  • NIC Network Interface Controller
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • the SRS has reached the following conclusions in the eLAA: support for the non-periodic sounding reference signal and the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (SRS with PUSCH) transmission.
  • Acyclic SRS (without PUSCH) is supported for transmission in the downlink sub-frame. The transmission of SRS in the uplink subframe is under further study.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the flow includes the following steps:
  • Step S202 determining a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position;
  • Step S204 transmitting the SRS at the determined symbol position.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined by the above steps, which effectively increases the transmission opportunity of the SRS.
  • the execution body of the above steps may be a user equipment or the like, but is not limited thereto.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol includes at least one of the following: a correspondence between the index number and a different number of symbols and a symbol position; and a predetermined number of symbols, the index number and the symbol The correspondence between the locations.
  • determining the symbol location for transmitting the SRS comprises determining a symbol location for transmitting the SRS based on the acquired index number.
  • the index number is obtained by at least one of the following methods: a manner of controlling RRC signaling by a high-layer radio link, a mode of controlling DCI signaling by a physical layer downlink control, and a pre-agreed by a base station and a user equipment UE.
  • a field for indicating an index number is added.
  • the signaling that explicitly indicates the symbol location used for transmitting the SRS includes at least one of the following signaling: high layer RRC signaling; physical layer DCI letter. Let, in the signaling, include a field for indicating the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  • the method for explicitly indicating the signaling includes: the high-layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high-layer RRC signaling.
  • the candidate time domain location is valid; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the high layer RRC signaling is configured as soon as possible; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling, It takes effect in the sub-frame or the uplink transmission burst at the end of the downlink transmission burst.
  • the means for explicitly indicating the signaling includes: the physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating the SRS transmission; or the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, The second physical layer DCI signaling indicates the symbol location of the SRS transmission.
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, including: the first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering the SRS transmission, where the field triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering an SRS transmission, Or, multiple SRS transmissions.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the SRS is determined by implicitly agreeing, including at least one of: determining a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end portion of the downlink transmission burst; The moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed is determined to determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS; the base station and the UE determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS in a manner agreed in advance.
  • the obtaining the time domain symbol position for the SRS transmission may include: determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the correspondence between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; according to the number of different symbols and the candidate time domain Determining the candidate time domain symbol position according to the symbol position correspondence; determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the high layer RRC signaling, or the candidate time domain symbol position; determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the physical layer DCI signaling, or a candidate time domain symbol position; determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to an implicit manner, or a candidate time domain symbol position; determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to a predefined manner, or a candidate time domain symbol position.
  • the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs may be determined by at least one of the following: a manner configured by high layer RRC signaling; and a physical layer DCI Mode of signaling configuration; through high-layer RRC signaling and physical layer The manner in which the DCI signaling is combined with the configuration; the method of combining the physical layer DCI signaling by N times, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; in a manner implicitly agreed; in a manner agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  • determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position by using the high layer RRC signaling configuration includes: configuring the parameter for the SRS transmission by using the high layer RRC signaling to determine the time domain subframe position or candidate The time domain sub-frame position; or the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the high-layer RRC signaling are valid once configured; or the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the high-layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst;
  • the parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset within time window , time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  • determining, by the physical layer DCI signaling configuration, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of the following: the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is on the subframe n. Transmitting, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position according to a predetermined timing relationship; carrying a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position in the physical layer DCI signaling, and determining a time domain according to the field Subframe position or candidate time domain subframe position.
  • determining, by using a combination of the high layer RRC signaling and the physical layer DCI signaling, that the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of the following: a high layer RRC signaling configuration for the SRS
  • the parameters of the transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the parameters of the SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling to be valid; the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling is configured with the upper layer RRC.
  • the high layer RRC signaling is configured to configure at least one of the parameters of the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe indicating the SRS transmission.
  • the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission
  • the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission And/or determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship
  • the parameter for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb Tooth, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window Starting position, one transmission, multiple transmissions.
  • determining, by using N times physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of: configuring SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position, the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or the SRS transmission is triggered by the second physical layer DCI signaling; SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling; the SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the a second physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship; determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, a time domain subframe position of transmitting the SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship
  • the predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; wherein n is a subframe number sent by the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission, or the physicality of the SRS transmission time domain symbol location The sub-frame number sent by the layer DCI signaling; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
  • k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following: a high-level RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4; common DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C; group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, adopting DCI format 3/3A; downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C; new DCI signaling.
  • the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by an implicit agreement, including at least one of the following: an SRS parameter configured to enable high layer RRC signaling configuration after the downlink transmission burst ends Or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling; the last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst; the first uplink subframe after the downlink transmission burst; the downlink transmission burst After the second uplink subframe, after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even number corresponding to the sub-frame.
  • the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe; the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; and the uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst
  • the frame index is an even-numbered subframe; the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe; wherein the SRS parameter includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, and an LBT Symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset in time window, interval in time window, starting position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  • the acquiring the time domain subframe position for the SRS transmission may include: determining the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship by triggering the subframe n transmitted by the physical layer DCI signaling of the SRS transmission. Or, the candidate time domain subframe position; the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission explicitly indicates the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain subframe position; triggers the SRS by the first physical layer DCI signaling And transmitting, by using the second physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, or a candidate time domain subframe position; triggering the SRS transmission by using the first physical layer DCI signaling, and adopting the second physical
  • the layer DCI signaling explicitly indicates the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain subframe position; the SRS transmission is triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by an
  • the time domain subframe used for transmitting the SRS may be a subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, or may be an uplink normal subframe.
  • the time domain symbol position for transmitting the SRS may be determined by at least one of the following manners: the UE may follow the pre- The number of remaining symbols in the subframe at the end of the defined downlink transmission burst corresponds to the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; the number of different symbols configured by the UE according to the RRC signaling and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or a sequence index number corresponding to the candidate time domain symbol position, determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in the end portion of the downlink burst, or a time domain symbol position of the candidate SRS transmission; the UE explicitly indicates in accordance with the physical layer DCI signaling The time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in
  • time domain subframe position or candidate time domain subframe position information for indicating SRS transmission and symbol position information for indicating SRS transmission in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or at different physical layer DCI In the signaling.
  • transmitting the SRS at the symbol position on the time domain subframe position may include the following cases: different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same one time domain symbol position; different UEs are in different time domain symbols. Location transmission; different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position; different UEs are transmitted in different candidate time domain symbol positions.
  • different UEs are multiplexed by different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts in the case of transmissions on the same time domain symbol location or candidate time domain symbol location.
  • transmitting, by the different UEs in the same or different candidate time domain symbol positions comprises: stopping the candidate time domain symbol positions in a case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS is successful in the candidate time domain symbol positions Transmitting SRS in other time domain symbol positions than the predetermined time domain symbol position; or, in the case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS in the candidate time domain symbol position is successful, continuing to be excluded in the candidate time domain symbol position
  • the SRS is transmitted at other time domain symbol locations than the predetermined time domain symbol location.
  • the method before the different UEs transmit in the same or different symbol positions, the method further includes: performing an LBT mechanism after the first listening, and transmitting the SRS at the symbol position if the LBT mechanism is successful.
  • performing the LBT mechanism includes: adopting the same or different LBT mechanisms for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein when different LBT mechanisms are used
  • the LBT mechanism performed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is simplified compared to the LBT mechanism performed before the latter candidate time domain symbol position, or there is a shorter contention window.
  • At least one of the following manners can be adopted to meet the regulatory requirement that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth: by repeating the SRS occupying the bandwidth for a predetermined number of times N, by increasing the length of the SRS sequence.
  • the method of modifying the subcarrier spacing by means of frequency domain frequency hopping, by means of resource block interleaving, by means of block interleaving.
  • the last partial subframe refers to a position at which the end of the transmission is a boundary of an OFDM symbol in the subframe, that is, the transmission end position is not a subframe boundary.
  • the beginning of a partial subframe means that the position of the start of the transmission does not start from the boundary of the subframe, but starts from the boundary of an OFDM symbol in the subframe.
  • the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst in the LAA includes one of the following: 3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14 symbols.
  • the number of different OFDM symbols and the time domain position of the SRS transmission are mainly given.
  • the correspondence between the number of different OFDM symbols and the SRS transmission interval or the candidate SRS transmission time domain position is also given.
  • Table 1 mainly shows the symbol positions at which the terminal UE transmits the SRS in one subframe for 1 to 14 or 1 to 12 OFDM symbols.
  • Table 1 Corresponding to the symbol position of SRS transmission according to the number of different symbols
  • the terminal UE can determine the time domain symbol position of an SRS transmission based on a sequence index number. Wherein, if the UE contends for the use right of the unlicensed carrier before the determined SRS symbol position, the UE transmits the SRS at the corresponding SRS symbol position. Conversely, give up this opportunity to transmit SRS at the SRS symbol location.
  • the UE may directly transmit the SRS without performing the LBT.
  • the preset duration can be 16us, or 25us.
  • the method for using the different symbol numbers corresponding to the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission is also applicable to the subframe level.
  • the number of OFDM symbols in the table is changed to the number of subframes, or the length of the time window, that is, the symbol index is replaced with the subframe index.
  • the symbol index is from 0 to 11 or 13
  • the subframe index is from 0 to 9.
  • a correspondence table between the number of remaining symbols in the subframe and the SRS transmission time domain symbol position is determined. As shown in Table 2.
  • Table 2 Table for determining the symbol position of the SRS transmission based on the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame of the downstream end
  • Another method is to independently formulate corresponding SRS transmission time domain symbol positions for different numbers of symbols (3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14) available in one subframe.
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
  • the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
  • Table 3 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink is 3
  • the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
  • Table 4 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 6.
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
  • the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
  • Table 5 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmission according to the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
  • the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
  • Table 6 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink is 10
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
  • the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
  • Table 7 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 11.
  • the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
  • Table 8 corresponds to the SRS transmission when the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 12. Symbol position
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
  • the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
  • Table 9 Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 14.
  • the main method is to improve the SRS transmission opportunity, that is, the UE has at least one symbol position available for SRS transmission.
  • the UE if the user equipment UE competes for the right to use the unlicensed carrier before the candidate SRS symbol position (ie, the LBT process is successfully completed according to the specific LBT mechanism, that is, the user is considered to compete for the use right of the unlicensed carrier), the UE is currently in the current The SRS is transmitted at the SRS symbol position. For the UE, the transmission is abandoned at the candidate other SRS symbol locations, or the candidate other SRS symbol locations are invalid for the UE.
  • the UE if the user equipment UE competes for the right to use the unlicensed carrier before the candidate SRS symbol position (ie, the LBT process is successfully completed according to the specific LBT mechanism, that is, the user is considered to compete for the use right of the unlicensed carrier), the UE is currently in the current The SRS is transmitted at the SRS symbol position.
  • the other SRS symbol positions are also transmitted at the candidate.
  • the UE may directly transmit the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions without performing LBT.
  • the UE still needs to perform the LBT mechanism before the transmission of the candidate SRS in the time domain symbol position (the LBT mechanism can be executed when the SRS has been successfully transmitted).
  • the LBT mechanism is more simplified (for example, 25us LBT Cat2), or, with a smaller contention window and a value of n in the defer period), the access right of the unlicensed carrier can be obtained.
  • the candidate time domain symbol position is transmitted.
  • the UE transmits a sparse occupancy signal on the blank symbol between the time domain symbol position of the successfully transmitted SRS and the next SRS time domain symbol position.
  • the following is the SRS transmission symbol position of the UE candidate for different OFDM symbol numbers.
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate When 3 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
  • Table 10 The transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate according to the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 3.
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate When 6 OFDM symbols, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
  • Table 11 Transmission symbol positions of SRSs corresponding to UE candidates when the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 6
  • the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate When 9 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
  • Table 12 shows the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate according to the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe.
  • the number of transmission symbol positions of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate is too large, and there is not one here. Listed.
  • the corresponding candidate SRS transmits the symbol position as above, and is also within the scope of protection of the present application.
  • the index number in the table and/or the table may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or, Physical layer DCI signaling configuration, and/or acquisition by the base station and the UE in a manner agreed upon in advance.
  • the index number in the table and/or the table may also be configured to the UE by the cell-level public parameter, or the UE-level parameter may be configured to the UE.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling for example, DCI format 0/4;
  • DCI signaling for example, DCI format 1C;
  • Group downlink control information Group DCI signaling for example, DCI format 3/3A;
  • Downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D;
  • New DCI signaling for example, in addition to the new format already available for DCI foramt;
  • a field indicating the index number in the table may be introduced, and/or used to trigger the upper layer.
  • the parameter enabled field of the RRC signaling configuration may be used, and/or used to trigger the upper layer.
  • a method for instructing a UE to transmit an SRS in a sub-frame of a downlink transmission burst is provided.
  • the method for determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, when the user equipment UE performs the SRS transmission in the downlink subframe of the downlink transmission burst includes:
  • Method 1 determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission by using a corresponding index number in the table by using a corresponding relationship table between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or Candidate time domain symbol location for SRS transmission.
  • the manner of obtaining the correspondence table between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission includes: the base station and the UE agree in advance; the upper layer RRC signaling configuration; or, the physical layer DCI Signaling configuration, or, in a predefined manner.
  • the index number is obtained, including: a high-level RRC signaling configuration index number; or a physical layer DCI signaling configuration index number; or a high-layer RRC signaling configuration index number, and an index of the upper layer RRC signaling configuration triggered by the physical layer DCI
  • the first layer takes effect; or the upper layer RRC signaling configures the index number and takes effect after the downlink transmission burst ends the subframe; or the upper layer RRC signaling configures the index number and takes effect in the uplink transmission burst; or, the first physical layer DCI
  • the SRS transmission is triggered, and the second physical layer DCI signaling configures an index number.
  • the sub-frame number sent by the second physical layer DCI signaling of the index number and the specific timing relationship may determine the subframe position where the index number is valid.
  • Method 2 Determine the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission by means of display, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  • the way to display including:
  • the period and offset of the SRS transmission are configured by the upper layer RRC signaling (the basic unit of the period of the SRS transmission is a symbol), and the time domain symbol position of the transmitted SRS in one subframe is determined by the period and offset of the SRS transmission.
  • the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted; wherein the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the subframe in which the candidate time domain symbol position is located may also be configured by high layer RRC signaling. or,
  • the time window length of the SRS transmission is configured by the upper layer RRC signaling, and/or the start position (symbol position, or time domain subframe position) of the SRS transmission time window, and/or, within the time window of the SRS transmission Offset, and/or SRS time domain resource interval in the time window of the SRS transmission (the SRS time domain resource may be a time domain symbol resource or a time domain subframe resource), and the information configured by the upper layer RRC determines the SRS transmission. Time domain symbol position, or candidate time domain symbol position. or,
  • Configuring high-frequency RRC signaling configuring a start of a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain of the SRS transmission
  • the number of symbols determines the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
  • Physical layer DCI signaling eg, UE-specific DCI signaling, eg, DCI format 0/4; or, common DCI signaling, eg, DCI format 1C; or, group downlink control information, Group DCI signaling, eg, DCI Format 3/3A; or downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D; or, new DCI signaling, for example, a new format other than DCI foramt; Configuring a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or a candidate time domain symbol position, wherein an SRS transmission is added in the physical layer DCI signaling. Field of time domain location or candidate time domain location; or,
  • Physical layer DCI signaling configuring a time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or a number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or , the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
  • Physical layer DCI signaling configuring the period and offset of the SRS transmission (where the basic unit of the SRS transmission period is a symbol), and determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in the subframe by the period and offset of the SRS transmission, Alternatively, the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted.
  • the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the subframe in which the candidate time domain symbol position is located may also be configured by physical layer DCI signaling; or
  • Physical layer DCI signaling configuring the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the starting position (symbol position, or time domain subframe position) of the SRS transmission time window, and/or, within the time window of the SRS transmission Offset, and/or SRS time domain resource interval in the time window of SRS transmission (SRS time domain resource may be time domain symbol resource, or time domain subframe resource), determined by information configured by physical layer DCI signaling The time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
  • the upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window
  • the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, and the message triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling to trigger the high layer RRC signaling configuration takes effect; or,
  • the upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window
  • the message triggering the configuration of the upper layer RRC signaling takes effect, and the SRS is triggered to perform one transmission, or multiple transmissions; or,
  • the upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window
  • the upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window
  • the upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time The starting position of the window, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and / Or, the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, the second physical layer DCI signaling triggering the first physical layer DCI signaling
  • the configured information takes effect; or,
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission
  • the second physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or, the SRS transmission
  • the physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window a starting location, and/or an offset within a time window of the SRS transmission, and/or an SRS time domain resource interval within a time window of the SRS transmission; or, a start of a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or, The time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, the message of the physical layer DCI signaling configuration is at the end of the downlink transmission burst end subframe Or, the uplink transmission burst is valid.
  • Method 3 Determine the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission in an implicit manner, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  • the symbol position of the SRS transmission is: symbol index #13 or symbol index #12 or symbol index #11 or symbol index #10, or the like, or
  • the time domain symbol position implicitly determining the candidate is: symbol index #13, symbol index #11, symbol index #9 or symbol index #10, symbol index #12, or implicitly determining the period and offset of the SRS transmission.
  • the amount thus determines the SRS symbol position, or the candidate time domain symbol position, for example, for 6 symbols, the time domain symbol positions determined by period 2 and offset 2 are 10 and 12.
  • the period is less than the number of symbols, and the offset is less than or equal to 0, and is greater than or equal to the number of symbols.
  • the number of symbols may be the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst.
  • the time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission is implicitly determined. For example, for 6 symbols, the time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission is a symbol index of 10.
  • there is an offset between the number of remaining symbols and the start position of the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission, and the offset of the time domain symbol of the initial SRS transmission is determined by the offset, and the offset may be the base station and the UE.
  • a method for determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position to which a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted includes:
  • Solution 1 Configuration through high-level RRC signaling. among them,
  • the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are effective immediately upon configuration; or,
  • the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst;
  • the parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset Shift, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  • Solution 2 Configuration through physical layer DCI signaling. among them,
  • the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship;
  • the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position, and determines a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
  • the predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; and k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following methods: a high layer RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
  • Solution 3 A combination of high-level RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling. among them,
  • the high-layer RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, and the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the physical layer DCI signaling triggering the high-layer RRC signaling are valid;
  • the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the unconfigured SRS transmission of the upper layer RRC signaling;
  • the high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and is determined according to the field for the SRS.
  • the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission and/or determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for the SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship. ;
  • the parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset Shift, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  • Solution 4 A method of combining DC physical signaling by N times. among them,
  • the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or Triggering SRS transmission by using a second physical layer DCI signaling;
  • SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
  • the DCI signaling triggers the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position enable of the SRS transmission determined by the first physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the SRS parameter configured by the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled in the uplink transmission burst, where
  • the parameters of the SRS transmission include at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, a symbol index of the LBT, a time domain pattern of the SRS transmission, a time window of the SRS transmission, and an offset within the time window. Time window interval, the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmissions;
  • the first uplink subframe After the downlink transmission burst, the first uplink subframe;
  • the second uplink subframe After the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe;
  • the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe
  • the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe
  • the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst is the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst
  • the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe
  • the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe.
  • the foregoing configuration signaling may also simultaneously configure a time domain subframe or a candidate subframe of the SRS transmission and/or configure a time domain of the SRS transmission. Symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position.
  • the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission and/or the time domain symbol position or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission may be triggered and/or determined by N physical layer DCI signaling manners.
  • N may be a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, N is 2.
  • the N may have physical layer DCI signaling, or RRC signaling configuration, or the base station and the UE agree in advance, or obtain or determine in a predefined manner.
  • the SRS transmission may be triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission may be determined by the secondary physical layer DCI signaling (eg, the common DCI signaling, that is, the DCI format 1C). And/or, the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain symbol position. or,
  • the SRS transmission may be triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the trigger signaling subframe and the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a specific timing relationship, and the secondary physical layer is adopted.
  • the DCI signaling e.g., the common DCI signaling, DCI format 1C
  • the SRS transmission may be triggered by physical layer DCI signaling and indicate the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and the secondary physical layer DCI signaling (eg, common DCI signaling, ie DCI format 1C) ) Configure the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain symbol position.
  • the secondary physical layer DCI signaling eg, common DCI signaling, ie DCI format 1C
  • the physical layer DCI signaling in the embodiment of the present invention includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 0/4; or common DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1C; or group downlink control information.
  • Group DCI signaling for example, DCI format 3/3A; or downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, such as DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D; or, new DCI signaling, for example, except a new format other than the DCI foramt; that is, an SRS time domain subframe, or a candidate SRS time domain subframe field may be added in the physical layer DCI signaling, and/or a time domain symbol position indicating the SRS transmission may be added, or a candidate SRS time domain symbol location field, and/or a field for triggering the SRS to perform a transmission, or multiple transmissions, and/or a field to increase the k value indicating the timing relationship.
  • the index number is configured by the upper layer RRC, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission.
  • the SRS time domain transmission location corresponding to the high-level RRC signaling configuration index number or the candidate time domain location of the SRS transmission includes two types: one is effective immediately after the high-layer RRC signaling configuration; and the other is through the physical layer DCI signaling. Trigger it to take effect.
  • the index number corresponding to the SRS time domain transmission location of the high layer RRC signaling configuration is the index in the table defined in Embodiment 1.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission determines the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to the n+k timing relationship in the subframe n, or the time domain subframe set location of the SRS transmission, or The position of the subframe where the index number is in effect.
  • k can be a positive integer
  • k can be a positive integer set.
  • k may be a positive integer greater than or equal to 0, or a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, or k is 0, and/or, 1, and/or, 2, and/or, 3, and/or 4, and / or, 5, and / or, 6, and / or, 7, or, k is a set, such as ⁇ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ⁇ .
  • Physical layer DCI signaling including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group (group) DCI signaling (eg, Format 3/3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling eg, format 0/4 signaling
  • common DCI signaling eg, format 1C
  • group (group) DCI signaling eg, Format 3/3A
  • DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • the RRC signaling configuration table 1 has the sequence number 3 (that is, the position of the OFDM symbol index number 13 in the high-layer RRC configuration subframe is the SRS transmission time domain symbol position).
  • the SRS is transmitted over the physical layer DCI signaling on which time domain subframes, or by configuring the time domain location of the SRS transmission by using higher layer RRC signaling.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling of the SRS transmission is triggered, such as UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling), or group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A), or DL grant (eg, , format 1A/2B/2C) signaling is transmitted in subframe n, and the time domain position of the SRS transmission is determined according to the timing relationship of n+k1 (where k1 is 4) in the LTE protocol. Further, the SRS transmission time domain subframe determined according to the n+k1 timing relationship is the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst end, and the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission should be at the end of the downlink transmission burst end subframe.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling eg, format 0/4 signaling
  • group DCI signaling eg, format 3/3A
  • DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 in order to ensure that an SRS is transmitted on a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst, Schematic diagram of a subframe transmitted by DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission.
  • the DCI signaling for triggering the SRS transmission in the LTE protocol is transmitted in the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to the n+4 timing relationship.
  • the uplink RRC signaling is configured.
  • the SRS transmits the symbol position, and the UE transmits the SRS on the symbol position in the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission.
  • the premise is that the LBT mechanism is performed before the SRS symbol position, and if the UE performs the LBT successfully before the SRS symbol position, the UE is in the SRS.
  • the SRS is transmitted on the symbol.
  • the UE fails to perform LBT before the SRS symbol position, the UE does not transmit the SRS on the SRS symbol. Alternatively, the UE does not perform LBT before the SRS symbol position, as long as the gap between the downlink transmission burst end position and the SRS symbol position is not greater than 16 us, or 25 us. If the subframe where the symbol position of the SRS transmission is located in the MCOT (the MCOT can be regarded as the downlink transmission burst+uplink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent downlink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent uplink transmission burst), then The 25-times Cat2LBT is executed before the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission.
  • the MCOT can be regarded as the downlink transmission burst+uplink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent downlink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent uplink transmission burst), or
  • the first subframe located within the MCOT performs Cat4LBT before the time domain symbol or subframe of the SRS transmission.
  • priority level 1 for example, the maximum contention window is 5, the minimum contention window 0, n in the defer period is 0, or 1, 1, or 2), or, priority Level 2 (eg, the maximum contention window is 7, the minimum contention window 3, n in the defer period is 0, or, 1, or 2).
  • priority of the uplink signal or channel is: SRS>PUSCH+SRS>PUSCH.
  • the parameter n in the LBT mechanism, and/or the random backoff value N is configured by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
  • a DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • a common DCI signaling eg, format 1C
  • a k of 0 indicates that DCI signaling for triggering the SRS transmission is transmitted on the subframe n, and it is determined that the subframe of the SRS transmission is also the subframe n. If k is 1, it means that the DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the SRS transmission is determined to be on the subframe n+1 according to the n+1 relationship. At this time, which symbol in the determined SRS transmission time domain subframe is transmitted by the UE is determined by the upper layer RRC signaling.
  • 4 is a first schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a method for determining an SRS according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • a second schematic diagram of the time domain subframe position of the transmission as shown in FIG. 4, or as shown in FIG.
  • Example 2 differs from Example 1 in that the UE has multiple candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol positions. Assume that the sequence number 174 in the high-layer RRC signaling configuration table 12 (ie, the position of the OFDM symbol index number in the high-layer RRC configuration subframe is 13, 10, 6, 5 is the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position).
  • the SRS is transmitted over the physical layer DCI signaling on which time domain subframes, or by configuring the time domain location of the SRS transmission by using higher layer RRC signaling.
  • physical layer DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission such as UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling), or group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A), or DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling, or common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C) is transmitted in subframe n, which determines the timing relationship of the time domain location of the SRS transmission, which may be in accordance with the existing n+ 4, or, according to the new n + k (where k is greater than or equal to 0, or, k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4) timing relationship, the method is the same as the example 1.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling eg, format 0/4 signaling
  • group DCI signaling eg, format 3/3A
  • DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • common DCI signaling eg, format 1C
  • the UE in the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position, if the UE performs LBT success before the first candidate symbol position, the UE transmits the SRS on the first symbol position. Conversely, if the UE performs LBT failure before the first candidate symbol position (LBT mechanism LBTCat4, and the maximum contention window is 5, the minimum contention window is 1, n is 1 in the defer period. Or, the LBT mechanism is 25us Cat2) Then, the UE abandons the transmission of the SRS at the first symbol position.
  • the LBT mechanism performed before the next candidate SRS symbol position may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed before the previous SRS symbol position, or before the previous SRS symbol position
  • the LBT mechanism is more simplified, or the LBT mechanism or parameters of the faster access channel (LBT mechanism LBT Cat4, and the largest competition)
  • the contention window is 3, the minimum contention window is 0, n is 0 in the defer period, or 1, or the LBT mechanism is 25us Cat2)). If the LBT is successful, the UE transmits on the current SRS symbol. Conversely, the LBT fails and the UE continues to attempt to perform LBT before the next SRS symbol position. Repeat the above method.
  • the UE successfully transmits the SRS on one of the candidate SRS symbols, and the symbol position of the other candidate transmission SRS is invalid for the UE, or the UE continues to perform the LBT before the candidate SRS symbol position, and the LBT succeeds. Next, send the SRS.
  • At least one of the SRS transmission symbol positions determined by the configuration may be a symbol in the downlink partial subframe, or the UE A side LBT failure causes the configured SRS symbol location to be undeliverable. This limits the chances of SRS transmission in partial subframes to some extent.
  • Manner 2 The physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and notifies the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position.
  • the SRS transmission time domain subframe is determined by DCI signaling, or the SRS transmission time domain subframe collection location passes a specific timing relationship.
  • the specific timing relationship includes one of the following: an n+4 timing relationship in the LTE protocol; or, according to a new definition relationship n+k. Where k is greater than or equal to 0, or k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, for example, k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like.
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method.
  • the parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
  • the difference from the method one is that the base station notifies which of the time domain subframes transmitted by the UESRS through the DCI signaling, or which symbols transmit the SRS.
  • the base station only needs to notify the sequence index number in the table in the embodiment to know the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position.
  • the base station can know the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, so that the UE can be notified from the table in Embodiment 1 of the SRS transmission symbol position corresponding to the number of remaining symbols, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol. position.
  • Manner 3 The physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the number of remaining symbols acquired by the UE through the checked common DCI implicitly determines the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the time domain symbol position of the candidate SRS transmission.
  • the SRS transmission can be triggered by one physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission time domain subframe position can still be determined by a specific timing relationship.
  • the specific timing relationship is one of the following:
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method.
  • the parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
  • the symbol position of the UE transmitting the SRS in the downlink end subframe may be implicitly determined according to the number of remaining symbols known by the common DCI signaling checked by the UE, or determined in a predefined manner, or the base station and the UE Determined in advance by way of agreement.
  • Implicitly determining the symbol position of the transmitted SRS including one of the following: the last symbol in the last part of the downlink transmission burst, or the second to last symbol in the last part of the downlink transmission burst, or downlink transmission
  • One symbol, or the symbol index in the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst is an even symbol, or the symbol index in the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst is an odd symbol, or a specific symbol set.
  • a specific symbol, or a specific symbol set may be previously agreed by the base station and the UE, or a predefined manner, or a high layer RRC configuration, or a physical layer DCI notification.
  • the UE may implicitly determine the last one of the remaining three symbols, or the first symbol, or the second, according to the remaining three symbols.
  • the symbols, or the first symbol and the third symbol, or the second symbol and the third symbol are the time domain symbol positions of the SRS transmission.
  • Manner 4 The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the second physical layer DCI indicates the sequence index of the SRS transmission.
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling only triggers the SRS transmission but passes through the second physical layer.
  • the DCI determines the time domain subframe or candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and, the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position.
  • 6 is a first DCI signaling trigger SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the second DCI signaling is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship, and the time domain subframe position and/or SRS transmission time of the SRS transmission is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship.
  • a schematic diagram of the location of the domain symbol as shown in Figure 6.
  • the time domain subframe sent by the first physical layer DCI signaling is located before the second physical layer DCI signaling transmission time domain subframe position.
  • the time domain subframe sent by the first physical layer DCI signaling may also be located after the second physical layer DCI signaling transmission time domain subframe position. That is to say, the former triggers the SRS transmission first, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index number of the SRS transmission are notified by the secondary physical layer DCI. Give the UE.
  • the sequence index of the SRS transmission is the sequence index number in the table in Embodiment 1.
  • the latter firstly informs the UE through a physical layer DCI signaling to determine the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index number of the SRS transmission.
  • the second physical layer DCI signaling triggers the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index of the SRS transmission The number is enabled.
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling, and/or the second physical layer DCI signaling may determine a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by using a specific timing relationship.
  • the specific timing relationship is one of the following: an n+4 timing relationship in the LTE protocol; or, according to a new definition relationship n+k. k is greater than or equal to 0, or k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, for example, k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like.
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method.
  • the parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
  • FIG. 7 is a first DCI signaling triggering SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention, and indicating a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to an n+k timing relationship, where the second DCI signaling determines an SRS transmission according to an n+k1 timing relationship.
  • Schematic diagram of the time domain symbol position as shown in FIG. 7, the first physical layer DCI signaling determines the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and the second physical layer DCI indicates the symbol position of the SRS transmission. Or, the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position.
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers SRS transmission
  • the second physical layer DCI indicates UE Determining a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, a symbol position of the SRS transmitted by the UE in the end portion of the downlink burst, or a symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS may be detected by the UE.
  • the number of remaining symbols learned by the public DCI signaling is implicitly determined.
  • the triggering of the SRS transmission according to the first physical layer DCI signaling means that the UE can transmit the SRS in the SRS transmission time domain subframe after receiving the triggering SRS transmission signaling.
  • the time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the second physical layer DCI signaling according to a specific timing relationship.
  • Manner 6 triggering and explicitly notifying the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position by the physical layer DCI signaling, and/or transmitting the symbol position of the SRS or the symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS.
  • Case 1 The physical layer DCI signaling explicitly informs the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position and the symbol position of the SRS in the SRS transmission subframe, or the symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS.
  • Case 2 The time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is triggered and explicitly notified by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the symbol position of the SRS in the downlink subframe at the end of the downlink burst, or the candidate transmission SRS The symbol position is implicitly determined by detecting the number of remaining symbols by detecting the common DCI signaling.
  • the method of implicitly determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position is the same as the method in the other methods in this embodiment.
  • Method 7 triggering SRS transmission by physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by an implicit manner, and/or transmitting a symbol position of the SRS, or a candidate transmission SRS Symbol location.
  • the implicit manner determines the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and/or the symbol position of the transmission SRS includes: a downlink subframe at the end of the downlink transmission, and/or a downlink transmission burst After the first uplink subframe, and/or, after the downlink transmission burst, the second a subframe, and/or a subframe in which an uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an even number, and/or an uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an odd subframe, or first The uplink subframe, and/or the second uplink subframe, and/or the subframe in which the uplink subframe index number is an even number, and/or the subframe in which the uplink subframe index number is an odd number.
  • the uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe, and/or the uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe, and/or the uplink subframe index number is The even-numbered subframes, and/or the number of subframes corresponding to the odd-numbered subframe index numbers, are related to M.
  • M is a subframe corresponding to an even subframe index of the downlink transmission burst, and/or a subframe corresponding to an odd subframe index of the uplink transmission burst, and/or an uplink subframe index
  • the number is an even-numbered subframe, and/or the number of subframes in which the uplink subframe index number is an odd number.
  • M may be configured by high-layer RRC signaling, or physical layer DCI signaling, or the base station and the UE may reserve in advance, or may be determined in a predefined manner.
  • the method of implicitly determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position is the same as the method in the other methods in this embodiment.
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by one of the above methods, and/or the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission. Further, different UEs may configure the same SRS transmission symbol position, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position. For different UEs to transmit on the same SRS time domain symbol, they can be multiplexed in the same symbol by cyclic shifting, and/or transmission combing. Cyclic shifts employed by different UEs, and/or transmission combs may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] .
  • s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7.
  • S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling in the embodiment of the present invention includes: UE-specific DCI signaling (for example, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (for example, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling. (eg, format 3/3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling for example, format 0/4 signaling
  • common DCI signaling for example, format 1C
  • group DCI signaling. eg, format 3/3A
  • DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • a method for transmitting SRS on different SRS symbol positions, or the same SRS symbol position, or the same candidate SRS symbol position is provided.
  • Case 1 A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for the case where the same one SRS symbol position is configured for different UEs.
  • the SRS transmission symbol is the last symbol of the remaining 6 symbols (eg, symbol index #13), and the manner of SRS transmission includes one of the following:
  • Manner 1 Different UEs perform LBT before the SRS symbol position and introduce a self-delay mechanism. Among them, the self-delay can be in the LBT mechanism, or at the end of the LBT mechanism. 8 is a schematic diagram of introducing a self-delay operation in an LBT mechanism when different UEs configure time-domain symbol positions of the same SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 8, different UEs may be configured with the same LBT mechanism. And/or, a collection of LBT parameters. For example, UE1 and UE2 configure the same LBT Cat4 mechanism with a random backoff value of N, n in the defer period.
  • the self-delay mechanism may be that the UE detects that the N value is decremented to 1 and starts from the delay until the SRS symbol, and the 9s before the SRS symbol can transmit the SRS in the SRS symbol as long as the UE detects the channel idle.
  • the self begins to perform a self-delay after the delay of the value of N decreases to zero.
  • the minimum granularity of the self-delay is 9 us, that is, the self-delay time domain length is an integer multiple of 9 us, or is an integer multiple of the specific CCA (Clear Channel Assessment) duration.
  • the specific CCA duration can be 16us, or 25us.
  • different UEs may use Cat2LBT to perform multiple CCA durations between the downlink transmission burst end symbol position and the SRS symbol position.
  • the number of times the CCA duration is executed is equal to the value of the downlink transmission burst end symbol position to the SRS symbol position duration divided by the CCA duration.
  • the downlink transmission symbol position to the SRS symbol position duration is not an integer multiple of the CCA duration, and the UE performs a CCA detection of the remaining duration for the remaining duration, and the CCA duration is the remaining duration.
  • the CCA duration can be 16us, or 25us, or 34us, or 43us.
  • the UE may directly send the SRS without performing the LBT mechanism.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a time domain structure in a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, when the downlink transmission burst end time reaches the start of the occupation signal, the gap is not greater than 16 us, or 25 us.
  • the UE may directly transmit the occupation signal without performing the LBT mechanism.
  • the occupied signals sent by different UEs may be multiplexed by frequency division, or may be multiplexed by code division by using different cyclic shift modes. That is, CCA gap1 can be omitted. Further, different UEs may use the same LBT mechanism in CCA gap2, and/or the LBT parameter set for channel access.
  • different UEs are configured with the same SRS symbol position, wherein different UEs may transmit different cyclic shifts and/or different transmission combs in the same SRS symbol.
  • Cyclic shifts employed by different UEs, and/or transmission combs may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the cyclic shift value range [0 ⁇ 7], or [0, s1] the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] .
  • s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7.
  • S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
  • Case 2 A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for a different one of the SRS symbol position cases for different UEs.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of different SRS transmission time domain symbols configured by different UEs in a downlink subframe of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • different UEs configure different SRS symbol positions, and different UEs.
  • the location where the CCA is executed is a symbol before the SRS symbol position, or the first P symbols.
  • P is a symbol greater than or equal to 1, and is smaller than the number of remaining symbols of the sub-frame at the end of the downlink transmission burst minus a specific value.
  • the special value may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or the number of symbols of the SRS in the subframe at the end of the downlink burst.
  • different SRSs Different UEs of symbol locations may be configured with different transmission combs, and/or, cyclically shifted, or configured with the same transmission combs, and/or cyclically shifted. Different UEs within the same SRS symbol location may be configured with different transmission combs, or cyclic shifts.
  • the cyclic shift, and/or the transmission comb can be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] . Where s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7.
  • S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
  • the different SRS symbol positions of different UE configurations may be the method of configuring SRS symbol positions in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2.
  • Case 3 A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for the case where different UEs are configured with the same candidate SRS symbol position.
  • candidate SRS symbol positions may be continuous in the time domain or may be composed of multiple symbols discrete in the time domain.
  • SRS symbol positions for different UE configurations are the same as those for configuring SRS symbol positions in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2.
  • different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts may be configured in UEs with different SRS symbol positions.
  • the UE may continue to perform the LBT and transmit the SRS, or may not transmit the SRS.
  • the SRS is sent directly without performing LBT.
  • the candidate SRS symbol locations may be discrete in the time domain.
  • the candidate SRS transmission symbol positions configured by the UE are 13, 11, 9.
  • the position of the CCA is before the symbol 9, the symbol 10, and the symbol 12.
  • the LBT may be LBT CaT4, the minimum contention window 0 or 1, the maximum contention window 5, and n is 0, or 1, in the defer period.
  • the LBT can be a Cat2LBT.
  • a specific resource is a specific RE or RB or RBG or subband. That is, UE1 sends on a specific resource. Occupancy signal or reserved signal, blank in the frequency domain except for specific resources.
  • the LBT performed by UE1 within symbol 10 may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed prior to symbol 9, or may be a more simplified LBT, or a shorter contention window. Or, Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us. If the SRS is successfully transmitted on the symbol 11, its candidate SRS symbol position transmission method is the same as above. Alternatively, if UE1 performs LBT success before symbol 9, the UE transmits SRS on symbol 9. UE1 may not transmit SRS on candidate symbols 11, 13.
  • UE1 fails to perform LBT before symbol 9, continue to execute LBT before proceeding to symbol 10, or symbol 11, wherein the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 10, or symbol 11, may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 9 Or, it is more simplified than the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 9, or a shorter contention window, or Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us. That is, if the UE performs an LBT failure before the current SRS symbol position, the LBT mechanism performed at the next SRS symbol position may be the same as the previous SRS symbol performing the LBT mechanism, or a shorter contention window, or a more simplified LBT mechanism. For example, Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us.
  • the LBT method performed by the candidate SRS symbol position transmitting SRS is analogously the same method as described above.
  • Case 4 A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for different UEs to configure different candidate SRS symbol position cases.
  • candidate SRS symbol positions of different UE configurations may overlap, or may overlap partially, or may not overlap.
  • different UEs configure different transmission combs or cyclic shifts in partially overlapping SRS symbol positions.
  • UEs with different overlapping SRS symbol positions may be configured with the same transmission comb, or the same cyclic shift, or different transmission combs, or different cyclic shifts.
  • the CSA frequency domain pattern can be used to avoid the collision between the SRS transmission position and the CCA execution position, that is, the transmission of the SRS is combed.
  • One of them is reserved for other UEs for CCA detection. That is to say, within one symbol, SRS and CCA are multiplexed by frequency division.
  • a method of "SRS without PUSCH”, “SRS with PUSCH” and “PUSCH” simultaneously transmitting congestion between LBT and PUSCH transmissions avoiding SRS in the same uplink subframe is provided.
  • the base station configures the subframe of the SRS without PUSCH, and the base station informs the UE of the blank to the penultimate of the subframe by the physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the symbol, the second to last symbol, is used to send the SRS to perform CCA.
  • the existing SRS symbol position is modified, that is, the last symbol in the subframe is modified to the first symbol in the subframe ("SRS without PUSCH", "SRS”
  • the CCA position of "with PUSCH” and “PUSCH” is the transmission "SRS without PUSCH”, the "SRS with PUSCH” and the last symbol of the previous subframe in the "PUSCH” subframe), or the second symbol
  • SRS Without PUSCH
  • the CCA position of "SRS with PUSCH” and “PUSCH” is the transmission "SRS without PUSCH", the "SRS with PUSCH” and the first symbol in the "PUSCH” subframe).
  • the new SRS symbol position may be notified to the UE through physical layer DCI signaling, or the subframe position in which the SRS without PUSCH is transmitted implicitly determines the SRS symbol position.
  • the subframe position for transmitting the SRS without PUSCH may be shared at the cell level.
  • Physical layer DCI signaling including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling (eg, format 3) /3A); or, DL grant (for example, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
  • This embodiment is based on the support of wideband SRS in the LAA system, and provides a solution to meet the bandwidth requirements of the ETSI when the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS ⁇ 2.
  • the bandwidth requirement in ETSI is that the transmission device transmits at least 80% of the total bandwidth on the unlicensed carrier.
  • the transmission bandwidth on the unlicensed carrier must also meet the bandwidth requirements in ETSI.
  • ETSI the bandwidth requirements in ETSI.
  • the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS is 0, 1, 2 meets the regulatory requirements that the transmission bandwidth in the ETSI accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth.
  • the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS is greater than 2, the SRS transmission bandwidth does not satisfy the bandwidth requirement in the ETSI.
  • the method for satisfying the requirement that the total bandwidth of the transmission bandwidth is at least 80% is as follows:
  • Method 1 The method of repeating N in the frequency domain.
  • the bandwidth of the SRS is determined according to B srs and C srs to determine the number of repetitions in the frequency domain, or the number of repetitions is signaled by the higher layer RRC or physical layer DCI.
  • B SRS 0
  • the number of repetitions in the corresponding frequency domain is 2.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a frequency domain repetition N satisfying an ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirement according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG.
  • the SRS sequence is started to be mapped according to the frequency domain starting point configured by the high layer RRC signaling or the physical layer DCI signaling. If the SRS sequence is repeatedly mapped on resources with less than 80% bandwidth.
  • Method 2 Increase the length of the SRS sequence until at least 80% of the corresponding bandwidth specified in the regulation.
  • Method 3 Increase the method of transmitting comb Comb. That is, the correspondence between the transmission comb Comb and the SRS transmission bandwidth is established.
  • the transmission comb Comb may be 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, and the like.
  • Method 4 Modify the subcarrier spacing. For example, different subcarrier spacings are corresponding according to different SRS bandwidths.
  • the Msrs is a PRB corresponding to the SRS bandwidth.
  • Method 5 Use the frequency domain frequency hopping method to meet the regulatory requirements that the nominal bandwidth meets at least 80% of the total bandwidth over a period of time.
  • the frequency domain frequency hopping mode is generally the same as the existing LTE technology, except that the time domain interval of the frequency hopping is changed from the subframe level to the symbol level. That is, at the end of the downlink burst, a partial subframe The remaining symbols, or the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions, or, in the configured SRS independent transmission subframe, the SRS frequency domain frequency hopping is frequency hopping in accordance with the symbols.
  • Method 6 Using the RB interleaving method.
  • the SRS may be mapped by the method of interpolating the RB, that is, according to the frequency domain starting point, the resources corresponding to the modb are mapped according to 96 mod2 (the interval of 2 is the RB), but each PRB is mapped according to the original comb.
  • Method 7 Use block interleaving.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of satisfying ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirements by using a block interleaving method, as shown in FIG. 12, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • This embodiment provides a method for processing a discontinuity of a signal transmitted by a user equipment UE in a multi-subframe scheduling scenario.
  • the symbol of the blank in the subframe is the symbol index 0 in the subframe. And/or, the PUSCH starts to transmit from the symbol index 0 in the subframe, and the PUSCH end symbol index is 12, or 11, in the case of a blank symbol in the subframe, the symbol index in the subframe is 13, or 12 and 13.
  • the PUSCH start symbol position, or the end symbol position, and/or the LBT performed symbol position may be configured by the base station to the UE through physical layer DCI signaling.
  • Method 1 implicitly instructing the UE to perform LBT at the blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes.
  • LBT can Use a 25us Cat2LBT mechanism, or a DRS-like LBT mechanism, or a Cat2LBT mechanism that randomly selects the CCA starting point, or a minimum contention window of 0, a maximum contention window of 5, a deter period where n is 0, or a Cat4LBT of 1 mechanism.
  • the defer period is determined by the fixed CCA duration plus n slots. The slot is 9us and the fixed CCA is 16us.
  • Method 2 explicitly indicate that the LBT is performed at the blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes through the physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling may indicate a symbol position at which PUSCH transmission starts, and/or a PUSCH transmission end symbol position, and/or a blank symbol position in a subframe, and/or an LBT mechanism, and/or an LBT.
  • the parameters corresponding to the mechanism such as the maximum contention window and the minimum contention window value, the random backoff value, the n value in the defer period, the CCA duration duration, and the CCA duration starting point.
  • Method 3 The UE sends a sparse reserved signal or an occupied signal at a blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes.
  • a sparse reserved signal or occupied signal means that the reserved signal or the occupied signal is only in a specific frequency domain resource (RE (Resource Element) or RB (Resource Block) or RBG (Resource Block Group). Send on group) or subband).
  • RE Resource Element
  • RB Resource Block
  • RBG Resource Block Group
  • Send on group or subband
  • Some or all of the frequency domain resources except for a specific frequency domain resource in the blank symbol may be used for other UEs to perform CCA, and PUSCH transmission and/or SRS transmission may be performed if the CCA is successful.
  • the frequency domain blank resource location and/or the time domain symbol location used to perform CCA may be dynamically notified to the UE by the base station through physical layer DCI signaling.
  • Physical layer DCI signaling including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/) 3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
  • UE-specific DCI signaling eg, format 0/4 signaling
  • common DCI signaling eg, format 1C
  • group DCI signaling eg, format 3/) 3A
  • DL grant eg, format 1A/2B/2C
  • This embodiment mainly provides a method for transmitting periodic SRS and aperiodic SRS.
  • the LAA performs opportunistic downlink or uplink transmission due to the uplink or downlink buffer state, thereby causing a discontinuity in the transmission signal.
  • the UE can perform SRS transmission at the SRS periodic point only when the UE performs the LBT successfully before the SRS periodic point and the PUSCH is present at the SRS periodic point. It is also possible that the UE can perform SRS transmission at the SRS periodic point only when the UE performs LBT success before the SRS cycle point. It is also possible to perform LBT even before the SRS cycle point of the UE. If the SRS transmission is successful, the SRS transmission cannot be performed at the SRS periodic point.
  • the SRS transmission can be attempted at the SRS periodic point only after the physical layer DCI signaling is triggered.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling triggering the SRS transmission may trigger the UE.
  • N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. For example, N is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
  • the UE attempting to perform SRS transmission at the periodic point of the SRS means that the LBT is successfully executed before the periodic point of the SRS, and the transmission can be performed at the SRS periodic point. Conversely, if the LBT failure is performed before the SRS cycle point, the transmission cannot be performed at the SRS cycle point.
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission can be configured through physical layer DCI signaling in addition to the high layer RRC signaling configuration.
  • the subframe position of the SRS transmission or the location of the candidate SRS transmission subframe configured by the physical layer DCI signaling may be adopted by one of the following methods:
  • the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for indicating a subframe position of the SRS transmission or a candidate SRS transmission subframe position.
  • the UE can know the time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS or the candidate time domain subframe position by receiving the DCI signaling.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a specific timing relationship value k.
  • the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position may be determined by a specific timing relationship value.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling is sent on the subframe n, and the subframe corresponding to the n+k is determined as the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the time domain of the candidate by receiving the DCI signaling and the specific timing relationship value carried.
  • Subframe position may be a value greater than or equal to 0, or may be a value greater than or equal to 4, and k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
  • Manner 3 The period and the offset of the high-layer RRC signaling configuration, only when the UE receives the physical layer DCI signaling sent by the base station, the period of the high-layer RRC signaling configuration and the time-domain subframe position or candidate corresponding to the offset At least one of the domain subframe positions is valid, or, available.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling may carry indication information indicating that the SRS performs one transmission in the candidate time domain subframe, or multiple transmissions.
  • the subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate SRS transmission subframe position may be determined in an implicit manner.
  • the SRS when receiving the common DCI signaling, the SRS may be known to be the first subframe in the uplink transmission burst, or And transmitting the even subframe or the odd subframe corresponding to the subframe index in the transmission burst (that is, the subframe within the burst length may be correspondingly transmitted through the subframe quotation mark or uplink)
  • the subframe corresponding to one of 0, 1, 2, ..., p-1 obtained by mod p is an SRS time domain subframe or a candidate SRS time domain subframe), or, a DRS subframe, or a downlink tail portion frame.
  • the SRS transmission on the SRS time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframes of the symbols or candidate time domain symbols may also be notified by physical layer DCI signaling, or the upper layer RRC signaling configuration, or the base station And the UE pre-determined, or, in a predefined manner.
  • the DCI signaling for determining the SRS time domain symbol or the candidate time domain symbol position, and the signaling for determining the SRS time domain subframe position or the candidate SRS time domain subframe position, and the signaling for triggering the SRS transmission may be the same One DCI signaling, or different DCI signaling.
  • the signaling for triggering the SRS transmission may multiplex the DCI format 0/4/1A/2B/2C/2D in the existing protocol, where for the SRS and the PUSCH, the trigger SRS transmission may adopt the DCI format 0. /4.
  • the triggering SRS transmission may be performed by using DCI format 2B/2C/2D, or DCI format 1C, or DCI format 3/3A.
  • DCI format 1C reserved bits may be utilized to indicate triggering SRS transmission.
  • DCI format 3/3A a field can be added to indicate the triggering of the SRS transmission.
  • a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe field of the SRS transmission is also added in the DCI format, and/or a time domain symbol of the SRS transmission or a candidate time domain symbol field is added, and/or , adding a field that triggers SRS to perform single transmission or multiple transmissions, and/or, adds a timing relationship value k.
  • the signaling that triggers the aperiodic SRS transmission triggers the SRS transmission.
  • the UE may be triggered to perform one SRS transmission, or N times SRS transmission.
  • the time domain location of the aperiodic SRS transmission may dynamically indicate the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position through physical layer DCI signaling, in addition to the SRS periodic point configured by the upper layer RRC.
  • the DCI signaling triggering refers to triggering the SRS to transmit, and/or triggering the UE to perform an SRS transmission in a candidate time domain subframe, or may perform multiple SRS transmissions.
  • the SRS transmission cannot be performed on the time domain subframe even if the UE has successfully performed the LBT.
  • the UE If the UE performs LBT successfully before one of the candidate time domain subframes, and receives DCI signaling sent by the base station, performs an SRS transmission according to the indication in the DCI signaling, or multiple times, the SRS transmission information is in the candidate. SRS transmission is performed on multiple SRS time domain subframe positions.
  • the SRS can be directly performed on the subsequent candidate SRS time domain locations. Send without having to perform LBT.
  • the candidate multiple SRS transmission time domain locations are discrete in the time domain, once the UE performs LBT success before one of the SRS transmission time domain locations, that is, only the current SRS time domain location can be transmitted.
  • the LBT mechanism is implemented. The second is to send a sparse reserved signal or occupy signal.
  • a sparse reserved signal or occupied signal means that the reserved signal or the occupied signal is transmitted only on a specific frequency domain resource on the total bandwidth, and the remaining frequency domain resources are vacant or reserved.
  • the reason for this is that the signals transmitted by the UE between the front and rear SRS time domain locations are discontinuous, which may result in loss of use of the channel at blank symbols or subframes between the front and rear SRS time domain locations, based on which, At blank symbols or subframes between the front and back SRS time domain locations, the UE either needs to transmit an occupancy signal or needs to perform LBT.
  • the processing method of performing SRS transmission on a plurality of candidate time domain subframes is also applicable to the case of performing SRS transmission on a plurality of candidate time domain symbol positions.
  • the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission may be a downlink end subframe, or a DRS subframe, or an uplink subframe in an uplink transmission burst, or at least one of the first subframe in an uplink transmission burst.
  • the time domain symbol position for performing SRS transmission on the remaining symbols in the downlink end subframe may be configured by physical layer DCI signaling, and/or, high layer RRC signaling configuration, and/or implicitly determined according to the remaining number of symbols.
  • the base station and the UE acquire in advance by way of agreement. And transmitting the SRS in the DRS subframe means that the SRS can transmit on at least one of the remaining two symbols in the DRS subframe.
  • Physical layer DCI signaling includes: UE-specific DCI (eg, DCI format 0/4) or, DL Grant (for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D) or common DCI (for example, DCI format 1C) or group DCI (for example, DCI format 3/3A), that is, at least one of physical layer DCI signaling.
  • UE-specific DCI eg, DCI format 0/4
  • DL Grant for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D
  • common DCI for example, DCI format 1C
  • group DCI for example, DCI format 3/3A
  • the foregoing embodiment or the embodiment is not limited to the application of the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission, and may also be used for the uplink transmission end subframe, or the uplink transmission start partial subframe, or the uplink complete subframe. , or, downlink complete subframe condition, or other scenarios (for example, LAA, SDL (Standalone Downlink), SUL (Standalone Uplinke), LAA DC (Double Connection), NB-IOT ( Narrow Band Internet of Things, cellular-based narrowband Internet of Things, MTC (Machine type communication), or other situations.
  • the method according to the above embodiment can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course, by hardware, but in many cases, the former is A better implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium (such as a ROM/RAM, a magnetic disk, an optical disk), and includes a plurality of instructions for making a terminal.
  • the device (which may be a cell phone, computer, server, or network device, etc.) performs the methods of various embodiments of the present invention.
  • a signal transmission device and a user equipment are also provided, which are used to implement the foregoing embodiments and implementation manners, and are not described again.
  • the term "module” may implement a combination of software and/or hardware of a predetermined function.
  • the apparatus described in the following embodiments may be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware Implementation is also possible and conceived.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 13, the apparatus includes a first determination module 132 and a first transmission module 134, which will be described below.
  • a first determining module 132 configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; the first transmission module 134, coupled to the first determining module 132, configured to transmit an SRS at the determined symbol position; wherein The symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position.
  • the first determining module is configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS according to at least one of the following manners:
  • the predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol includes at least one of the following: a correspondence between the index number and a different number of symbols and a symbol position; and a predetermined number of symbols, the index number and the symbol The correspondence between the locations.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the structure of the first determining module 132 in the signal transmission apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the first determining module 132 includes: a first determining unit 142, and the first determining is performed below. Unit 142 is described.
  • the first determining unit 142 is configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the acquired index number.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the structure of the first determining module 132 in the signal transmission apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the first determining module 132 includes: a first acquiring unit 152, and the first obtaining is performed below. Unit 152 is described.
  • the first obtaining unit 152 is configured to obtain an index number by using at least one of the following manners: a manner of controlling RRC signaling by a high-layer radio link, a method of controlling downlink information by a physical layer downlink, and a method of using a base station and a user equipment UE in advance The agreed manner; wherein a field for indicating an index number is added in RRC signaling or physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the signaling that explicitly indicates the symbol location for transmitting the SRS includes at least one of the following signaling: high layer RRC signaling; physical layer DCI signaling, where signaling A field is included for indicating the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  • the high-layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location
  • the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high-layer RRC signaling or the candidate time domain location takes effect; or, the upper layer The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the RRC signaling is configured as soon as it is configured; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is at the end of the downlink transmission burst or the uplink transmission. Effective in burst.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating SRS transmission; or the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers SRS transmission, and the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling. Symbol location.
  • the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, including: the first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering the SRS transmission, where the field triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering an SRS transmission, Or, multiple SRS transmissions.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the SRS is determined by implicitly agreeing, including at least one of: determining a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end portion of the downlink transmission burst; The moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed is determined to determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS; the base station and the UE determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS in a manner agreed in advance.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 16, the apparatus includes, in addition to all the modules shown in FIG. 13, a second determining module 172, which is described below. The second determination module 172 is described.
  • the second determining module 172 is connected to the foregoing first determining module 132, and is configured to determine, by at least one of the following manners, a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs: by using a higher layer RRC The mode of signaling configuration; the mode of configuration by physical layer DCI signaling; the combination of high-layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling; and the combination of N physical layer DCI signaling, where N is greater than or equal to An integer of 1; by implicit convention The way; through the way agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  • the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using a high layer RRC signaling configuration, including: configuring, by using high layer RRC signaling, for SRS transmission.
  • the parameters determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position; or, the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the high layer RRC signaling are effective once configured; or the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling
  • the parameters for the SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, SRS transmission Time window, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window start position, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  • the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using physical layer DCI signaling configuration, including at least one of the following: a physical medium that triggers SRS transmission.
  • the layer DCI signaling is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling carries the indication time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe.
  • the field of the location determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
  • the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using a combination of high layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling, including at least one of the following: : high-level RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, physical layer DCI signaling triggers high-level RRC signaling configuration parameters for SRS transmission to take effect; high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission The physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the SRS transmission that are not configured by the high-layer RRC signaling; the high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries the time domain indicating the SRS transmission.
  • parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following : period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset within time window, time Inter-window interval, the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmissions.
  • the second determining module 172 is further configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by combining the N times physical layer DCI signaling, including at least one of the following:
  • the physical layer DCI signaling configures the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and enables the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration by using the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or
  • the second physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission; the SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling;
  • the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to the predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling; the first physical layer DCI signaling according to the predetermined timing The relationship determines a time domain sub
  • the predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; wherein n is a subframe number of physical layer DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 Is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
  • k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following: a high-level RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
  • the physical layer DCI signaling includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4; common DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C; group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, adopting DCI format 3/3A; downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C; new DCI signaling.
  • the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by using an implicit agreement, including at least one of the following: after the downlink transmission burst ends The SRS parameter configured in the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling; the last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst; after the downlink transmission burst The first uplink subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink transmission burst is uplinked The subframe index is an odd-numbered subframe; the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is
  • the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position information used to indicate the SRS transmission, and the symbol location information used to indicate the SRS transmission are in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or Different physical layer DCI signaling.
  • the foregoing first transmission module 134 is configured to transmit the SRS on the determined symbol position, including: different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same one time domain symbol position; different UEs are different. Time domain symbol position transmission; different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position; different UEs are transmitted in different candidate time domain symbol positions.
  • different UEs are multiplexed by different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts in the case of transmissions at the same symbol position.
  • transmitting, by the different UEs in the same or different candidate time domain symbol positions comprises: stopping the candidate time domain symbol positions in a case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS is successful in the candidate time domain symbol positions Transmitting SRS in other time domain symbol positions than the predetermined time domain symbol position; or, in the case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS in the candidate time domain symbol position is successful, continuing to be excluded in the candidate time domain symbol position
  • the SRS is transmitted at other time domain symbol locations than the predetermined time domain symbol location.
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram 3 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 17, the apparatus includes, in addition to all the modules shown in FIG. 13, an execution module 182, and the execution module 182. Be explained.
  • the execution module 182 is connected to the first transmission module 134, and is configured to perform an LBT mechanism after the different UEs transmit in the same or different symbol positions. In the case that the LBT mechanism is successful, the first The transmission module transmits the SRS at the symbol location.
  • the execution mode The block is set to: use the same or different LBT mechanisms for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein when different LBT mechanisms are used, the LBT mechanism performed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is later than the latter candidate time domain symbol position
  • the previously implemented LBT mechanism is simplified, or there is a shorter competition window.
  • the apparatus further includes: a satisfying module, configured to meet at least one of the following manners, satisfying a regulatory requirement that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth: by repeating the manner in which the SRS occupies a predetermined number of times of bandwidth N, By increasing the length of the SRS sequence, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, by modifying the subcarrier spacing, by means of frequency domain hopping, by means of resource block interleaving, by means of block interleaving.
  • a satisfying module configured to meet at least one of the following manners, satisfying a regulatory requirement that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth: by repeating the manner in which the SRS occupies a predetermined number of times of bandwidth N, By increasing the length of the SRS sequence, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, by modifying the subcarrier spacing, by means of frequency domain hopping, by means of resource block interleaving, by means of block interleaving.
  • FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a user equipment UE 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 18, the UE 10 includes the signal transmission device 192 of any of the above.
  • each of the above modules may be implemented by software or hardware.
  • the foregoing may be implemented by, but not limited to, the foregoing modules are all located in the same processor; or, the above modules are in any combination.
  • the forms are located in different processors.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a storage medium.
  • the storage medium may be configured to store program code for performing the following steps:
  • the foregoing storage medium may include, but not limited to, a U disk, a Read-Only Memory (ROM), a Random Access Memory (RAM), a mobile hard disk, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
  • ROM Read-Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • mobile hard disk a magnetic disk
  • magnetic disk a magnetic disk
  • optical disk a variety of media that can store program code.
  • the processor executes the method steps described in the above embodiments according to the program code stored in the storage medium.
  • the signal transmission method, apparatus, and user equipment of the embodiments of the present invention are not Applicable only to unlicensed carrier scenarios. It can also be applied to scenarios where licensed carriers and other types of carriers are used.
  • the modules or steps of the above embodiments of the present invention may be implemented by a general-purpose computing device, which may be centralized on a single computing device or distributed over a network of multiple computing devices, which may be implemented by computing devices.
  • the executed program code is implemented such that they can be stored in a storage device by a computing device, and in some cases, the steps shown or described can be performed in a different order than here, or they can be
  • Each of the integrated circuit modules is fabricated separately, or a plurality of modules or steps thereof are fabricated into a single integrated circuit module.
  • the application is not limited to any particular combination of hardware and software.
  • the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined, and the effect of effectively improving the transmission opportunity of the SRS is achieved.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a signal transmission method and device, and a user equipment. The method comprises: determining a symbol position for transmitting a sounding reference signal (SRS); and transmitting an SRS over the determined symbol position.

Description

信号传输方法、装置及用户设备Signal transmission method, device and user equipment 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及但不限于通信领域,尤指一种信号传输方法、装置及用户设备(User Equipment,简称为UE)。The present application relates to, but is not limited to, the field of communications, and more particularly to a signal transmission method, apparatus, and user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short).
背景技术Background technique
随着数据业务的快速增长,授权频谱的载波上承受的数据传输压力也越来越大。因此,通过非授权频谱的载波来分担授权载波中的数据流量成为后续长期演进(Long Term Evolution,简称为LTE)发展的一个重要的演进方向。其中:非授权频谱具有如下特征:免费/低费用;准入要求低,成本低;可用带宽大;资源共享;等等。With the rapid growth of data services, the data transmission pressure on the carrier of the licensed spectrum is also increasing. Therefore, sharing the data traffic in the licensed carrier through the carrier of the unlicensed spectrum becomes an important evolution direction of the development of the Long Term Evolution (LTE). Among them: unlicensed spectrum has the following characteristics: free/low cost; low entry requirements, low cost; large available bandwidth; resource sharing;
在授权协助接入(Licensed Assisted Access,简称为LAA)的标准化研究过程中,探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,简称为SRS)作为一个重要的议题正在被研究。引入SRS的目的在于获取上行定时和上行信道状态信息(Channel State Information,简称为CSI)。此外,LAA是天然的时分双工(Time Division Duplex,简称为TDD)载波,根据信道互易性可以利用下行CSI来获取上行的CSI。但是,由于先听后说LBT(Listen Before Talk,简称为LBT)机制限制了下行信号传输,因此,基站很难及时从UE侧获取信道信息反馈。除此之外,下行CSI还具有测量机会少,测量和上报之间时延大等特征,从而使得LAA上行发送SRS成为一个必选项。基于此,当前Rel-14eLAA中已经开始研究和讨论SRS传输。In the standardized research process of Licensed Assisted Access (LAA), Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) is being studied as an important issue. The purpose of introducing SRS is to obtain uplink timing and uplink channel state information (CSI). In addition, the LAA is a natural Time Division Duplex (TDD) carrier, and the downlink CSI can be used to obtain uplink CSI according to channel reciprocity. However, since the LBT (Listen Before Talk, LBT for short) mechanism restricts the downlink signal transmission, it is difficult for the base station to obtain channel information feedback from the UE side in time. In addition, the downlink CSI also has the characteristics of less measurement opportunities and large delay between measurement and reporting, so that the LAA uplink SRS is a mandatory option. Based on this, the SRS transmission has been studied and discussed in the current Rel-14eLAA.
发明概述Summary of invention
以下是对本文详细描述的主题的概述。本概述并非是为了限制权利要求的保护范围。The following is an overview of the topics detailed in this document. This Summary is not intended to limit the scope of the claims.
本发明实施例提供了一种信号传输方法、装置及用户设备,以提高SRS的传输机会。 The embodiment of the invention provides a signal transmission method, device and user equipment to improve the transmission opportunity of the SRS.
根据本发明的一个实施例,提供了一种信号传输方法,包括:确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置。According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a signal transmission method comprising: determining a symbol position for transmitting a sounding reference signal SRS; transmitting the SRS at the determined symbol position; wherein the symbol position is Time domain symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position.
根据本发明的另一实施例,提供了一种信号传输装置,包括:第一确定模块,设置为确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;第一传输模块,设置为在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置。According to another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a signal transmission apparatus comprising: a first determining module configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting a sounding reference signal SRS; a first transmission module configured to determine The SRS is transmitted at a symbol position; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position.
根据本发明的又一实施例,提供了一种用户设备UE,包括上述任一项所述的装置。According to a further embodiment of the invention, there is provided a user equipment UE, comprising the apparatus of any of the above.
根据本发明的又一个实施例,还提供了一种存储介质。该存储介质设置为存储用于执行上述信号传输方法的程序代码。According to still another embodiment of the present invention, a storage medium is also provided. The storage medium is arranged to store program code for performing the above signal transmission method.
通过本发明实施例,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置,达到有效提高SRS的传输机会的效果。Through the embodiment of the present invention, the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined, and the effect of effectively improving the transmission opportunity of the SRS is achieved.
在阅读并理解了附图和详细描述后,可以明白其他方面。Other aspects will be apparent upon reading and understanding the drawings and detailed description.
附图概述BRIEF abstract
图1是本发明实施例的一种信号传输方法的用户设备的硬件结构框图;1 is a block diagram showing the hardware structure of a user equipment of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图2是根据本发明实施例的信号传输方法的流程图;2 is a flow chart of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图3是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k确定SRS传输时域子帧位置的示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图4是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k1确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置的第一示意图;4 is a first schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图5是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k1确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置的第二示意图;FIG. 5 is a second schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图6是根据本发明实施例的第一DCI信令触发SRS传输,第二DCI信令按照n+k或n+k1定时关系确定的SRS传输的时域子帧位置和/或SRS传输的时域符号位置的示意图; 6 is a first DCI signaling trigger SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention. The second DCI signaling is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship, and the time domain subframe position and/or SRS transmission time of the SRS transmission is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship. Schematic diagram of the location of the domain symbol;
图7是根据本发明实施例的的第一DCI信令触发SRS传输并按照n+k定时关系指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置,第二DCI信令按照n+k1定时关系确定SRS传输的时域符号位置的示意图;7 is a first DCI signaling triggering SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention, and indicating a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to an n+k timing relationship, where the second DCI signaling determines an SRS transmission according to an n+k1 timing relationship. Schematic diagram of the location of the time domain symbol;
图8是根据本发明实施例的不同UE配置相同的SRS传输的时域符号位置时,在LBT机制中引入自延迟操作的示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of introducing a self-delay operation in an LBT mechanism when different UEs configure a time domain symbol position of the same SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图9是根据本发明实施例的下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中时域结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a time domain structure in a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图10是根据本发明实施例的在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中不同UE配置不同的SRS传输时域符号的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of different SRS transmission time domain symbols configured by different UEs in a downlink subframe of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图11是根据本发明实施例的频域重复N满足ETSI管制带宽要求的示意图;11 is a schematic diagram of frequency domain repetition N satisfying ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirements according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图12是根据本发明实施例的利用块交织方式满足ETSI管制带宽要求的示意图;12 is a schematic diagram of satisfying an ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirement by using a block interleaving method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图13是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图一;FIG. 13 is a block diagram 1 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图14是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置中第一确定模块132的结构框图一;FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram 1 of a first determining module 132 in a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图15是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置中第一确定模块132的结构框图二;FIG. 15 is a second structural block diagram of a first determining module 132 in a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图16是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图二;16 is a structural block diagram 2 of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图17是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图三;17 is a block diagram 3 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图18是根据本发明实施例的用户设备UE 10的结构框图。FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a user equipment UE 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
详述Detailed
下文中将参考附图并结合实施例来详细说明本申请。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请中的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合。The present application will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings in conjunction with the embodiments. It should be noted that the embodiments in the present application and the features in the embodiments may be combined with each other without conflict.
需要说明的是,本申请的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后 次序。It should be noted that the terms "first", "second" and the like in the specification and claims of the present application and the above drawings are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not necessarily used to describe a specific order or sequence. order.
实施例1Example 1
本申请实施例一所提供的方法实施例可以在用户设备、计算机终端或者类似的运算装置中执行。以运行在用户设备上为例,图1是本发明实施例的一种信号传输方法的用户设备的硬件结构框图。如图1所示,用户设备10可以包括一个或多个(图中仅示出一个)处理器102(处理器102可以包括但不限于微处理器MCU或可编程逻辑器件FPGA等的处理装置)、用于存储数据的存储器104、以及用于通信功能的传输装置106。本领域普通技术人员可以理解,图1所示的结构仅为示意,其并不对上述电子装置的结构造成限定。例如,用户设备10还可包括比图1中所示更多或者更少的组件,或者具有与图1所示不同的配置。The method embodiment provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application can be executed in a user equipment, a computer terminal, or the like. Taking a user equipment as an example, FIG. 1 is a hardware structural block diagram of a user equipment of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, user equipment 10 may include one or more (only one shown) processor 102 (processor 102 may include, but is not limited to, a processing device such as a microprocessor MCU or a programmable logic device FPGA) A memory 104 for storing data, and a transmission device 106 for communication functions. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the structure shown in FIG. 1 is merely illustrative and does not limit the structure of the above electronic device. For example, user device 10 may also include more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 1, or have a different configuration than that shown in FIG.
存储器104可设置为存储应用软件的软件程序以及模块,如本发明实施例中的信号传输方法对应的程序指令/模块,处理器102通过运行存储在存储器104内的软件程序以及模块,从而执行各种功能应用以及数据处理,即实现上述的方法。存储器104可包括高速随机存储器,还可包括非易失性存储器,如一个或者多个磁性存储装置、闪存、或者其他非易失性固态存储器。在一些实例中,存储器104可进一步包括相对于处理器102远程设置的存储器,这些远程存储器可以通过网络连接至用户设备10。上述网络的实例包括但不限于互联网、企业内部网、局域网、移动通信网及其组合。The memory 104 can be configured as a software program and a module for storing application software, such as program instructions/modules corresponding to the signal transmission method in the embodiment of the present invention, and the processor 102 executes each by executing a software program and a module stored in the memory 104. A functional application and data processing, that is, the above method is implemented. Memory 104 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or other non-volatile solid state memory. In some examples, memory 104 may further include memory remotely located relative to processor 102, which may be connected to user device 10 over a network. Examples of such networks include, but are not limited to, the Internet, intranets, local area networks, mobile communication networks, and combinations thereof.
传输装置106设置为经由一个网络接收或者发送数据。上述的网络实例可包括用户设备10的通信供应商提供的无线网络。在一个实例中,传输装置106包括一个网络适配器(Network Interface Controller,简称为NIC),其可通过基站与其他网络设备相连从而可与互联网进行通讯。在一个实例中,传输装置106可以为射频(Radio Frequency,简称为RF)模块,其设置为通过无线方式与互联网进行通讯。Transmission device 106 is arranged to receive or transmit data via a network. The network instance described above may include a wireless network provided by a communication provider of the user equipment 10. In one example, the transmission device 106 includes a Network Interface Controller (NIC) that can be connected to other network devices through a base station to communicate with the Internet. In one example, the transmission device 106 can be a Radio Frequency (RF) module configured to communicate with the Internet wirelessly.
在上述背景下,截至目前,eLAA中关于SRS已达成如下结论:支持非周期探测参考信号与物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,简称为SRS with PUSCH)传输。支持非周期探测参考信号不与物理上行共享 信道SRS without PUSCH传输。支持非周期SRS(无PUSCH)在下行末尾部分子帧中传输。SRS在上行子帧中传输正进一步研究。In the above context, as of now, the SRS has reached the following conclusions in the eLAA: support for the non-periodic sounding reference signal and the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (SRS with PUSCH) transmission. Support for aperiodic sounding reference signals not shared with physical uplinks Channel SRS without PUSCH transmission. Acyclic SRS (without PUSCH) is supported for transmission in the downlink sub-frame. The transmission of SRS in the uplink subframe is under further study.
在本实施例中提供了一种运行于用户设备的信号传输方法,图2是根据本发明实施例的信号传输方法的流程图,如图2所示,该流程包括如下步骤:In this embodiment, a signal transmission method running on a user equipment is provided. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a signal transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the flow includes the following steps:
步骤S202,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置;Step S202, determining a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position;
步骤S204,在确定的符号位置上传输SRS。Step S204, transmitting the SRS at the determined symbol position.
通过上述步骤确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置,有效地提高了SRS的传输机会。The symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined by the above steps, which effectively increases the transmission opportunity of the SRS.
上述步骤的执行主体可以为用户设备等,但不限于此。The execution body of the above steps may be a user equipment or the like, but is not limited thereto.
在一实施方式中,根据如下方式至少之一,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置:In an embodiment, the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined according to at least one of the following:
根据符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系的方式;a manner according to a predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol;
采用信令明确指示的方式;Adopting a clear indication of signaling;
隐含约定的方式。Implied convention.
在一实施方式中,符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系包括如下对应关系至少之一:索引号与不同符号数目及符号位置之间的对应关系;在预定的符号数目下,索引号与符号位置之间的对应关系。In an embodiment, the predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol includes at least one of the following: a correspondence between the index number and a different number of symbols and a symbol position; and a predetermined number of symbols, the index number and the symbol The correspondence between the locations.
在一实施方式中,确定用于传输SRS的符号位置包括:根据获取的索引号,确定用于传输SRS的符号位置。In an embodiment, determining the symbol location for transmitting the SRS comprises determining a symbol location for transmitting the SRS based on the acquired index number.
在一实施方式中,通过以下方式至少之一,获取索引号:通过高层无线链路控制RRC信令的方式;通过物理层下行控制信息DCI信令的方式;通过基站和用户设备UE事先约定的方式;其中,在RRC信令,或者物理层DCI信令中增加用于指示索引号的字段。In an embodiment, the index number is obtained by at least one of the following methods: a manner of controlling RRC signaling by a high-layer radio link, a mode of controlling DCI signaling by a physical layer downlink control, and a pre-agreed by a base station and a user equipment UE. In the RRC signaling, or physical layer DCI signaling, a field for indicating an index number is added.
在一实施方式中,信令明确指示的方式中,明确指示用于传输SRS的符号位置的信令包括如下信令至少之一:高层RRC信令;物理层DCI信 令,其中,信令中包括用于指示SRS传输的符号位置的字段。In an embodiment, in a manner that the signaling is explicitly indicated, the signaling that explicitly indicates the symbol location used for transmitting the SRS includes at least one of the following signaling: high layer RRC signaling; physical layer DCI letter. Let, in the signaling, include a field for indicating the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
在一实施方式中,所述采用信令明确指示的方式包括:高层RRC信令配置SRS传输时域位置或候选的时域位置,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置一经配置立即生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置,在下行传输burst(突发)末尾部分子帧或上行传输burst中生效。In an embodiment, the method for explicitly indicating the signaling includes: the high-layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high-layer RRC signaling. Or the candidate time domain location is valid; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the high layer RRC signaling is configured as soon as possible; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling, It takes effect in the sub-frame or the uplink transmission burst at the end of the downlink transmission burst.
在一实施方式中,所述采用信令明确指示的方式包括:物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示用于SRS传输的符号位置字段;或者,第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的符号位置。In an embodiment, the means for explicitly indicating the signaling includes: the physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating the SRS transmission; or the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, The second physical layer DCI signaling indicates the symbol location of the SRS transmission.
在一实施方式中,第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,包括:第一物理层DCI信令中携带用于触发SRS传输的字段,其中,触发SRS传输的字段包括:触发一次SRS传输,或者,多次SRS传输。In an embodiment, the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, including: the first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering the SRS transmission, where the field triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering an SRS transmission, Or, multiple SRS transmissions.
在一实施方式中,通过隐含约定的方式确定用于传输SRS的符号位置,包括以下至少之一:根据下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数目确定用于传输SRS的符号位置;先听后说LBT机制执行成功的时刻确定用于传输SRS的符号位置;基站和UE事先约定的方式确定用于传输SRS的符号位置。In an embodiment, the symbol position for transmitting the SRS is determined by implicitly agreeing, including at least one of: determining a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end portion of the downlink transmission burst; The moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed is determined to determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS; the base station and the UE determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS in a manner agreed in advance.
综上可知,获取用于SRS传输的时域符号位置可以包括以下方式:根据不同符号数目与SRS传输的时域符号位置对应关系确定SRS传输的时域符号位置;根据不同符号数目与候选时域符号位置对应关系确定候选时域符号位置;根据高层RRC信令确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置;根据物理层DCI信令确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置;根据隐含方式确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置;根据预定义的方式确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置。In summary, the obtaining the time domain symbol position for the SRS transmission may include: determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the correspondence between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; according to the number of different symbols and the candidate time domain Determining the candidate time domain symbol position according to the symbol position correspondence; determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the high layer RRC signaling, or the candidate time domain symbol position; determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to the physical layer DCI signaling, or a candidate time domain symbol position; determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to an implicit manner, or a candidate time domain symbol position; determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission according to a predefined manner, or a candidate time domain symbol position.
在一实施方式中,可以通过以下方式至少之一,确定用于传输SRS的符号位置所属的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置:通过高层RRC信令配置的方式;通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式;通过高层RRC信令和物理层 DCI信令结合配置的方式;通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,其中,N为大于等于1的整数;通过隐含约定的方式;通过基站和UE事先约定的方式。In an embodiment, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs may be determined by at least one of the following: a manner configured by high layer RRC signaling; and a physical layer DCI Mode of signaling configuration; through high-layer RRC signaling and physical layer The manner in which the DCI signaling is combined with the configuration; the method of combining the physical layer DCI signaling by N times, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; in a manner implicitly agreed; in a manner agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
在一实施方式中,通过高层RRC信令配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置包括:通过高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;或者,高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,一经配置立即生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,在上行传输burst期间生效;其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an embodiment, determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position by using the high layer RRC signaling configuration includes: configuring the parameter for the SRS transmission by using the high layer RRC signaling to determine the time domain subframe position or candidate The time domain sub-frame position; or the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the high-layer RRC signaling are valid once configured; or the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the high-layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst; The parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset within time window , time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
在一实施方式中,通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置可以包括以下至少之一:触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照预定定时关系,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;在物理层DCI信令中携带指示时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置。In an embodiment, determining, by the physical layer DCI signaling configuration, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of the following: the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is on the subframe n. Transmitting, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position according to a predetermined timing relationship; carrying a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position in the physical layer DCI signaling, and determining a time domain according to the field Subframe position or candidate time domain subframe position.
在一实施方式中,通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置可以包括以下至少之一:高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数生效;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令配置高层RRC信令未配置的SRS传输的参数;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令中携带指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和/或按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的 起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an implementation manner, determining, by using a combination of the high layer RRC signaling and the physical layer DCI signaling, that the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of the following: a high layer RRC signaling configuration for the SRS The parameters of the transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the parameters of the SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling to be valid; the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling is configured with the upper layer RRC. Signaling unconfigured parameters of the SRS transmission; the high layer RRC signaling is configured to configure at least one of the parameters of the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe indicating the SRS transmission. a field of a location, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to the field; the high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission And/or determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship; wherein, the parameter for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb Tooth, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window Starting position, one transmission, multiple transmissions.
在一实施方式中,通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置可以包括以下至少之一:由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令,按照预定定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置使能。In an embodiment, determining, by using N times physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position may include at least one of: configuring SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position, the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or the SRS transmission is triggered by the second physical layer DCI signaling; SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling; the SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the a second physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship; determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, a time domain subframe position of transmitting the SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship Or the candidate time domain subframe position, triggering the SRS transmission by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or triggering the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission determined by the first physical layer DCI signaling by the second physical layer DCI signaling Or candidate time domain subframe position enable
在一实施方式中,预定定时关系包括:n+k;或者,n+k1;其中,n为触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧号,或者,SRS传输时域符号位置的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧索号;k为大于等于4的正整数;k1为大于等于0的正整数。In an embodiment, the predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; wherein n is a subframe number sent by the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission, or the physicality of the SRS transmission time domain symbol location The sub-frame number sent by the layer DCI signaling; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
在一实施方式中,k或k1可以通过以下方式至少之一获取:高层RRC信令配置;物理层DCI信令指示;基站和UE事先约定方式。In an embodiment, k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following: a high-level RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
在一实施方式中,物理层DCI信令包括以下之一:UE专有DCI信令,采用DCI format 0/4;公共DCI信令,采用DCI format 1C;组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,采用DCI format 3/3A;下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,采用DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;新DCI信令。In an embodiment, the physical layer DCI signaling includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4; common DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C; group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, adopting DCI format 3/3A; downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C; new DCI signaling.
在一实施方式中,通过隐含约定的方式,确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置包括以下至少之一:下行传输burst结束之后使能高层RRC信令配置的SRS参数或物理层DCI信令明确指示的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;下行传输burst之后的末尾部分子帧;下行传输burst之后,第一个上行子帧;下行传输burst之后,第二个上行子帧;下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子 帧;下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;上行传输burst中第一个上行子帧;上行传输burst中第二个上行子帧;上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;其中,SRS参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an embodiment, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by an implicit agreement, including at least one of the following: an SRS parameter configured to enable high layer RRC signaling configuration after the downlink transmission burst ends Or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling; the last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst; the first uplink subframe after the downlink transmission burst; the downlink transmission burst After the second uplink subframe, after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even number corresponding to the sub-frame. Frame; after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe; the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; and the uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst The frame index is an even-numbered subframe; the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe; wherein the SRS parameter includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, and an LBT Symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset in time window, interval in time window, starting position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
综上可知,获取用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置可以包括以下方式:通过触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧n,按照特定的定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置;通过触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令明确指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置;通过第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令按照特定的定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置;通过第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令明确指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置;通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过隐含方式确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置;通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过预定义方式确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选时域子帧位置。In summary, the acquiring the time domain subframe position for the SRS transmission may include: determining the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship by triggering the subframe n transmitted by the physical layer DCI signaling of the SRS transmission. Or, the candidate time domain subframe position; the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission explicitly indicates the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain subframe position; triggers the SRS by the first physical layer DCI signaling And transmitting, by using the second physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, or a candidate time domain subframe position; triggering the SRS transmission by using the first physical layer DCI signaling, and adopting the second physical The layer DCI signaling explicitly indicates the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain subframe position; the SRS transmission is triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by an implicit manner, or The candidate time domain subframe position is triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined by a predefined manner.
其中,用于传输SRS的时域子帧可以为下行传输burst末尾部分子帧,也可以为上行正常子帧。在一实施方式中,在用于传输SRS的时域子帧为下行传输burst末尾部分子帧的情况下,可以通过以下方式至少之一确定用于传输SRS的时域符号位置:UE可以按照预定义的下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余符号数目对应SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置;UE按照RRC信令配置的不同符号数目与SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置对应的序列索引号,确定SRS在下行burst末尾部分中传输SRS的时域符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的时域符号位置;UE按照物理层DCI信令明确指示在下行burst末尾部分中传输SRS的时域符号位置,或者,候选时域符号位置;UE通过检测的公共DCI信令获知剩余符号数目来隐含确定在下行burst末尾部分中传输SRS的时域符号位 置,或者,候选时域符号位置。The time domain subframe used for transmitting the SRS may be a subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, or may be an uplink normal subframe. In an embodiment, when the time domain subframe used for transmitting the SRS is the downlink transmission burst partial subframe, the time domain symbol position for transmitting the SRS may be determined by at least one of the following manners: the UE may follow the pre- The number of remaining symbols in the subframe at the end of the defined downlink transmission burst corresponds to the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; the number of different symbols configured by the UE according to the RRC signaling and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or a sequence index number corresponding to the candidate time domain symbol position, determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in the end portion of the downlink burst, or a time domain symbol position of the candidate SRS transmission; the UE explicitly indicates in accordance with the physical layer DCI signaling The time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in the end portion of the downlink burst, or the candidate time domain symbol position; the UE knows the number of remaining symbols by detecting the common DCI signaling to implicitly determine the time domain symbol bit of the SRS transmitted in the end portion of the downlink burst Set, or, candidate time domain symbol position.
上述用于指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置信息,和,用于指示SRS传输的符号位置信息在同一个物理层DCI信令中,或者,在不同的物理层DCI信令中。The above-mentioned time domain subframe position or candidate time domain subframe position information for indicating SRS transmission, and symbol position information for indicating SRS transmission in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or at different physical layer DCI In the signaling.
在一实施方式中,在时域子帧位置上的符号位置上传输SRS可以包括以下几种情况:不同的用户设备UE在相同的一个时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在不同的时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在相同的候选时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在不同的候选时域符号位置传输。In an embodiment, transmitting the SRS at the symbol position on the time domain subframe position may include the following cases: different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same one time domain symbol position; different UEs are in different time domain symbols. Location transmission; different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position; different UEs are transmitted in different candidate time domain symbol positions.
在一实施方式中,不同的UE在相同的时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置上传输的情况下,通过不同传输梳齿和/或循环移位方式复用。In an embodiment, different UEs are multiplexed by different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts in the case of transmissions on the same time domain symbol location or candidate time domain symbol location.
在一实施方式中,不同的UE在相同或不同的候选时域符号位置传输包括:在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输SRS成功的情况下,停止在候选时域符号位置中除预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输SRS;或者,在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输SRS成功的情况下,继续在候选时域符号位置中除预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输SRS。In an embodiment, transmitting, by the different UEs in the same or different candidate time domain symbol positions comprises: stopping the candidate time domain symbol positions in a case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS is successful in the candidate time domain symbol positions Transmitting SRS in other time domain symbol positions than the predetermined time domain symbol position; or, in the case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS in the candidate time domain symbol position is successful, continuing to be excluded in the candidate time domain symbol position The SRS is transmitted at other time domain symbol locations than the predetermined time domain symbol location.
在一实施方式中,不同的UE在相同或不同的符号位置传输之前,还包括:执行先听后说LBT机制,在执行LBT机制成功的情况下,在所述符号位置上传输SRS。In an embodiment, before the different UEs transmit in the same or different symbol positions, the method further includes: performing an LBT mechanism after the first listening, and transmitting the SRS at the symbol position if the LBT mechanism is successful.
在一实施方式中,所述符号位置为候选时域符号位置时,执行所述所述LBT机制包括:对于不同候选时域符号位置采用相同或不同的LBT机制,其中,采用不同的LBT机制时,在前一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制比后一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制简化,或者有更短的竞争窗。In an embodiment, when the symbol position is a candidate time domain symbol position, performing the LBT mechanism includes: adopting the same or different LBT mechanisms for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein when different LBT mechanisms are used The LBT mechanism performed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is simplified compared to the LBT mechanism performed before the latter candidate time domain symbol position, or there is a shorter contention window.
基于Rel-14 3GPP Ran1#84bis次会议的结论,关于在非授权载波上的传输带宽问题达成如下共识:Agreement:Only wideband SRS transmission in supported in eLAA;Existing max#SRS RBs for a given system bandwidth is the baseline;FFS whether or not to extend/shift to#of RBs>max#RBs in the  legacy case。Based on the conclusion of the Rel-14 3GPP Ran1#84bis meeting, the following consensus is reached on the transmission bandwidth problem on unlicensed carriers: Agreement: Only wideband SRS transmission in supported in eLAA; Existing max#SRS RBs for a given system bandwidth is the Baseline;FFS whether or not to extend/shift to#of RBs>max#RBs in the Legacy case.
基于上述会议结论,目前LAA中仅支持宽带的SRS传输。除此之外,SRS的传输带宽必须满足管制中规定的占用总带宽的至少80%的要求。然而,根据LTE技术,SRS传输带宽中仅有CSRS=0,1,2满足ETSI(European Telecommunications Standards Institute,欧洲电信标准化协会)中关于带宽的管制要求。基于此,LAA中在支持宽带SRS的前提下,需要考虑CSRS≥2时,满足ETSI中关于带宽的管制要求的方法。Based on the conclusions of the above meeting, only the SRS transmission of broadband is currently supported in the LAA. In addition, the transmission bandwidth of the SRS must meet the requirements of at least 80% of the total occupied bandwidth specified in the regulations. However, according to the LTE technology, only C SRS =0, 1, 2 in the SRS transmission bandwidth satisfies the bandwidth regulation requirements of the ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute). Based on this, in the LAA, under the premise of supporting broadband SRS, it is necessary to consider the method of complying with the bandwidth requirements of ETSI when C SRS ≥ 2.
鉴于此,在本实施例中,可以通过以下方式至少之一,满足SRS传输带宽占总带宽至少80%的管制要求:通过重复SRS所占带宽预定次数N的方式,通过增加SRS序列的长度的方式,通过增大传输梳齿的方式,通过修改子载波间隔的方式,通过频域跳频的方式,通过资源块交织的方式,通过块交织的方式。In view of this, in the embodiment, at least one of the following manners can be adopted to meet the regulatory requirement that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth: by repeating the SRS occupying the bandwidth for a predetermined number of times N, by increasing the length of the SRS sequence. In a manner, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, the method of modifying the subcarrier spacing, by means of frequency domain frequency hopping, by means of resource block interleaving, by means of block interleaving.
为说明上述方法实施例,提供以下实施例进行说明。需要说明的是,为实现本申请的效果,并不限于以下所列举的实施例。In order to explain the above method embodiments, the following embodiments are provided for explanation. It should be noted that the effects of the present application are not limited to the embodiments listed below.
实施例1Example 1
本实施例中,给出不同OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing,正交频分复用)符号数目与SRS传输时域位置之间的对应关系。In this embodiment, a correspondence relationship between different OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol numbers and SRS transmission time domain positions is given.
对于LAA下行,Rel-13中已明确规定允许下行出现部分子帧。其中,部分子帧又分为开始部分子帧,和,末尾部分子帧。For the LAA downlink, it is explicitly stated in Rel-13 that some sub-frames are allowed to appear in the downlink. Among them, some sub-frames are further divided into a starting partial subframe, and a last partial subframe.
在一实施方式中,末尾部分子帧是指传输结束的位置为子帧中某个OFDM符号的边界,即传输结束位置不是子帧边界。顾名思义,开始部分子帧是指传输开始的位置不是从子帧的边界开始,而是从子帧中某个OFDM符号边界开始。In an embodiment, the last partial subframe refers to a position at which the end of the transmission is a boundary of an OFDM symbol in the subframe, that is, the transmission end position is not a subframe boundary. As the name implies, the beginning of a partial subframe means that the position of the start of the transmission does not start from the boundary of the subframe, but starts from the boundary of an OFDM symbol in the subframe.
在一实施方式中,截止目前为止,LAA中下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数目包括以下之一:3,6,9,10,11,12,14符号。In an embodiment, the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst in the LAA includes one of the following: 3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14 symbols.
本实施例中,主要给出不同OFDM符号数目与SRS传输时域位置间对 应关系,还给出了不同OFDM符号数目与SRS传输区间之间或候选SRS传输时域位置之间的对应关系。包括:In this embodiment, the number of different OFDM symbols and the time domain position of the SRS transmission are mainly given. Correspondingly, the correspondence between the number of different OFDM symbols and the SRS transmission interval or the candidate SRS transmission time domain position is also given. include:
不同OFDM符号数目与SRS传输时域位置间对应关系Correspondence between the number of different OFDM symbols and the time domain position of SRS transmission
表1主要给出针对1~14或1~12个OFDM符号时,终端UE在一个子帧中,传输SRS的符号位置。Table 1 mainly shows the symbol positions at which the terminal UE transmits the SRS in one subframe for 1 to 14 or 1 to 12 OFDM symbols.
表1:根据不同符号数目对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 1: Corresponding to the symbol position of SRS transmission according to the number of different symbols
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000006
从表1可以看到,终端UE可以根据一个序列索引号确定一个SRS传输的时域符号位置。其中,若UE在确定的SRS符号位置之前竞争到非授权载波的使用权,UE就在对应的SRS符号位置传输SRS。反之,放弃本次在SRS符号位置传输SRS的机会。或者,若下行传输结束至SRS传输符号位置间的gap(间隔)不大于预设时长,则UE可不执行LBT,直接传输SRS。例如,预设时长可以为16us,或者,25us。As can be seen from Table 1, the terminal UE can determine the time domain symbol position of an SRS transmission based on a sequence index number. Wherein, if the UE contends for the use right of the unlicensed carrier before the determined SRS symbol position, the UE transmits the SRS at the corresponding SRS symbol position. Conversely, give up this opportunity to transmit SRS at the SRS symbol location. Alternatively, if the gap (interval) between the end of the downlink transmission and the SRS transmission symbol position is not greater than the preset duration, the UE may directly transmit the SRS without performing the LBT. For example, the preset duration can be 16us, or 25us.
本实施例中,提供的利用不同符号数目对应SRS传输的时域符号位置的方法,也同样适用于子帧级。例如,该表格中OFDM符号数更换成子帧数,或,时间窗长度,也就是,将符号索引更换成子帧索引。其中,符号索引是从0至11或13,而子帧索引是从0值9。In this embodiment, the method for using the different symbol numbers corresponding to the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission is also applicable to the subframe level. For example, the number of OFDM symbols in the table is changed to the number of subframes, or the length of the time window, that is, the symbol index is replaced with the subframe index. Wherein, the symbol index is from 0 to 11 or 13, and the subframe index is from 0 to 9.
或者,仅针对下行部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数(3,6,9,10,11,12,14)制定一个子帧中剩余符号数目与SRS传输时域符号位置间的对应关系表格,如表2。Or, for each of the OFDM symbol numbers (3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14) remaining in the downlink partial subframe, a correspondence table between the number of remaining symbols in the subframe and the SRS transmission time domain symbol position is determined. As shown in Table 2.
表2:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数确定SRS传输的符号位置的表Table 2: Table for determining the symbol position of the SRS transmission based on the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame of the downstream end
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000010
另一种方法是:针对一个子帧中可用的不同符号数目(3,6,9,10,11,12,14)独立制定对应的SRS传输时域符号位置。Another method is to independently formulate corresponding SRS transmission time domain symbol positions for different numbers of symbols (3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14) available in one subframe.
3个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 3 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为3时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 3, the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
表3:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为3时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 3: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink is 3
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000012
6个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 6 OFDM symbols are used, it corresponds to the transmission symbol position of the SRS.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为6时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 6, the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
表4:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为6时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 4: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 6.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000013
9个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 9 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为9时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 9, the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
表5:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为9时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 5: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmission according to the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000015
10个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 10 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为10时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 10, the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
表6:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为10时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 6: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink is 10
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000017
11个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 11 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为11时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 11, the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
表7:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为11时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 7: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 11.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000018
12个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 12 OFDM symbols are used, it corresponds to the transmission symbol position of the SRS.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为12时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 12, the symbol positions at which the UE can transmit the SRS are as follows:
表8根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为12时,对应SRS传输的 符号位置Table 8 corresponds to the SRS transmission when the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 12. Symbol position
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000019
14个OFDM符号时,对应SRS的传输符号位置。When 14 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS is corresponding.
假定下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧中剩余的OFDM符号数为14时,UE可以传输SRS的符号位置如下:Assuming that the number of OFDM symbols remaining in the last partial subframe of the end of the downlink transmission burst is 14, the symbol position at which the UE can transmit the SRS is as follows:
表9:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为14时,对应SRS传输的符号位置Table 9: Symbol positions corresponding to SRS transmissions when the number of symbols remaining in the sub-frame at the end of the downlink is 14.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000021
不同OFDM符号数目与候选的SRS传输时域符号位置之间的对应关系Correspondence between the number of different OFDM symbols and the position of the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol
这部分,主要是给出一种提高SRS传输机会的方法,即UE有至少一个符号位置可用于进行SRS传输。In this part, the main method is to improve the SRS transmission opportunity, that is, the UE has at least one symbol position available for SRS transmission.
其中,在候选的SRS符号位置,传输SRS有两种情况:Among them, in the candidate SRS symbol position, there are two cases of transmitting SRS:
一种是:用户设备UE在候选的SRS时域符号位置之一上进行了SRS传输,在其余的候选时域符号位置上不再进行SRS传输。One is that the user equipment UE performs SRS transmission on one of the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions, and no longer performs SRS transmission on the remaining candidate time domain symbol positions.
即如果用户设备UE在候选的SRS符号位置之前竞争到非授权载波的使用权(即按照特定的LBT机制成功完成LBT过程,即认为用户竞争到非授权载波的使用权),则UE在当前的SRS符号位置上传输SRS。对于该UE,在候选的其它SRS符号位置放弃传输,或者,候选的其它SRS符号位置对于该UE失效。That is, if the user equipment UE competes for the right to use the unlicensed carrier before the candidate SRS symbol position (ie, the LBT process is successfully completed according to the specific LBT mechanism, that is, the user is considered to compete for the use right of the unlicensed carrier), the UE is currently in the current The SRS is transmitted at the SRS symbol position. For the UE, the transmission is abandoned at the candidate other SRS symbol locations, or the candidate other SRS symbol locations are invalid for the UE.
另一种是:用户设备UE在候选的SRS时域符号位置之一上发送了SRS,其余的候选时域符号位置依然对于该UE可用。 Another is that the user equipment UE transmits the SRS on one of the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions, and the remaining candidate time domain symbol positions are still available to the UE.
即如果用户设备UE在候选的SRS符号位置之前竞争到非授权载波的使用权(即按照特定的LBT机制成功完成LBT过程,即认为用户竞争到非授权载波的使用权),则UE在当前的SRS符号位置上传输SRS。在候选的其他SRS符号位置也进行传输,在一实施方式中,如果候选的SRS符号位置是时域上连续的,则UE在候选的SRS时域符号位置可以直接传输,不用执行LBT。反之,若候选的SRS符号位置是时域上离散的,则UE在候选的SRS的时域符号位置上进行传输之前,仍然需要执行LBT机制(该LBT机制可以比已经成功发送SRS时所执行的LBT机制更加简化(例如,25us的LBT Cat2),或,采用更小的竞争窗和defer period(延迟期)中的n值),在获取到非授权载波的使用权的前提下,才可以在候选的时域符号位置上进行传输。或者,若候选的SRS符号位置是时域上离散的,则UE在成功发送SRS的时域符号位置至下个SRS时域符号位置之间的空白符号上发送稀疏的占用信号。That is, if the user equipment UE competes for the right to use the unlicensed carrier before the candidate SRS symbol position (ie, the LBT process is successfully completed according to the specific LBT mechanism, that is, the user is considered to compete for the use right of the unlicensed carrier), the UE is currently in the current The SRS is transmitted at the SRS symbol position. The other SRS symbol positions are also transmitted at the candidate. In an embodiment, if the candidate SRS symbol positions are consecutive in the time domain, the UE may directly transmit the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions without performing LBT. On the other hand, if the candidate SRS symbol position is discrete in the time domain, the UE still needs to perform the LBT mechanism before the transmission of the candidate SRS in the time domain symbol position (the LBT mechanism can be executed when the SRS has been successfully transmitted). The LBT mechanism is more simplified (for example, 25us LBT Cat2), or, with a smaller contention window and a value of n in the defer period), the access right of the unlicensed carrier can be obtained. The candidate time domain symbol position is transmitted. Alternatively, if the candidate SRS symbol positions are discrete in the time domain, the UE transmits a sparse occupancy signal on the blank symbol between the time domain symbol position of the successfully transmitted SRS and the next SRS time domain symbol position.
下面将给出定义的不同OFDM符号数目与UE候选可传输的SRS符号位置的对应关系。同样可以制定一个总的表格,即在这张表格可以查询到一个子帧中不同符号对应的SRS传输符号位置。如表10。The correspondence between the defined number of different OFDM symbols and the position of the SRS symbol that the UE candidate can transmit is given below. It is also possible to formulate a general table in which the SRS transmission symbol positions corresponding to different symbols in one sub-frame can be queried. As shown in Table 10.
下面为针对不同OFDM符号数时,UE候选的SRS传输符号位置。The following is the SRS transmission symbol position of the UE candidate for different OFDM symbol numbers.
3个OFDM符号时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置。When 3 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
表10:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为3时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置Table 10: The transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate according to the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 3.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000023
6个OFDM符号时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置。When 6 OFDM symbols, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
表11:根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为6时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置Table 11: Transmission symbol positions of SRSs corresponding to UE candidates when the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe is 6
索引号The index number 候选的SRS的传输符号索引Candidate SRS transmission symbol index
00 1313
11 1212
22 1111
33 1010
44 99
55 88
66 13,1213,12
77 13,1113,11
88 13,1013,10
99 13,913,9
1010 13,813,8
1111 12,1112,11
1212 12,1012,10
1313 12,912,9
1414 12,812,8
1515 11,1011,10
1616 11,911,9
1717 11,811,8
1818 10,910,9
1919 10,810,8
2020 9,89,8
21twenty one 13,12,1113,12,11
22twenty two 13,12,1013,12,10
23twenty three 13,12,913,12,9
24twenty four 13,12,813,12,8
2525 13,11,1013,11,10
2626 13,11,913,11,9
2727 13,11,813,11,8
2828 13,10,913,10,9
2929 13,10,813,10,8
3030 12,11,1012,11,10
3131 12,11,912,11,9
3232 12,11,812,11,8
3333 12,10,912,10,9
3434 12,10,812,10,8
3535 12,9,812,9,8
3636 11,10,911,10,9
3737 11,10,811,10,8
3838 11,9,811,9,8
3939 10,9,810,9,8
4040 13,12,11,1013,12,11,10
4141 13,12,11,913,12,11,9
4242 13,12,11,813,12,11,8
4343 13,12,10,913,12,10,9
4444 13,12,10,813,12,10,8
4545 13,12,9,813,12,9,8
4646 13,11,10,913,11,10,9
4747 13,11,10,813,11,10,8
4848 13,11,9,813,11,9,8
4949 13,10,9,813,10,9,8
5050 12,11,10,912,11,10,9
5151 12,11,10,812,11,10,8
5252 12,11,9,812,11,9,8
5353 12,10,9,812,10,9,8
5454 11,10,9,811,10,9,8
5555 13,12,11,10,913,12,11,10,9
5656 13,12,11,10,813,12,11,10,8
5757 13,12,11,9,813,12,11,9,8
5858 13,12,10,9,813,12,10,9,8
5959 13,11,10,9,813,11,10,9,8
6060 12,11,10,9,812,11,10,9,8
6161 13,12,11,10,9,813,12,11,10,9,8
9个OFDM符号时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置。When 9 OFDM symbols are used, the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate.
表12根据下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数为9时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置Table 12 shows the transmission symbol position of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate according to the number of symbols remaining in the downlink end subframe.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000035
因一个子帧中剩余符号数为9,或,10,或,11,或,12,或,14个OFDM符号时,对应UE候选的SRS的传输符号位置组合数量太多,这里就不一一罗列。当针对一个子帧中剩余9,或,10,或,11,或,12,或,14个OFDM符号时,对应的候选SRS传输符号位置的方法同上,也在本申请保护的范围之内。Since the number of remaining symbols in one subframe is 9, or 10, or 11, 11, or 12, or 14 OFDM symbols, the number of transmission symbol positions of the SRS corresponding to the UE candidate is too large, and there is not one here. Listed. When there are 9, or 10, or 11, 11, or 12, or 14 OFDM symbols remaining in one subframe, the corresponding candidate SRS transmits the symbol position as above, and is also within the scope of protection of the present application.
本实施例中,建立的不同OFDM符号数目与SRS传输时域位置,或者,候选的SRS传输位置对应关系表格,表格和/或表格中的索引号可以由高层RRC信令配置,和/或,物理层DCI信令配置,和/或,基站和UE事先约定的方式获取。其中,表格和/或表格中的索引号也可以由小区级公共参数配置给UE,或者,UE级参数配置给UE。In this embodiment, the established number of different OFDM symbols and the SRS transmission time domain location, or the candidate SRS transmission location correspondence table, the index number in the table and/or the table may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or, Physical layer DCI signaling configuration, and/or acquisition by the base station and the UE in a manner agreed upon in advance. The index number in the table and/or the table may also be configured to the UE by the cell-level public parameter, or the UE-level parameter may be configured to the UE.
本发明实施例中所涉及的物理层DCI信令,包括:The physical layer DCI signaling involved in the embodiment of the present invention includes:
UE专有DCI信令,比如,DCI format 0/4;UE-specific DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 0/4;
公共DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1C; Public DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1C;
组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,比如,DCI format 3/3A;Group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 3/3A;
下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D;Downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D;
新DCI信令,比如,除了已有DCI foramt以外的新的格式;New DCI signaling, for example, in addition to the new format already available for DCI foramt;
其中,如果采用物理层DCI信令指示表格中的索引号,和/或,触发高层RRC信令配置的参数使能时,可以引入指示表格中索引号的字段,和/或,用于触发高层RRC信令配置的参数使能的字段。If the index in the physical layer DCI signaling indication table is used, and/or the parameter that triggers the configuration of the upper layer RRC signaling is enabled, a field indicating the index number in the table may be introduced, and/or used to trigger the upper layer. The parameter enabled field of the RRC signaling configuration.
实施例2Example 2
在本实施例中,提供一种指示UE在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中传输SRS的方法。In this embodiment, a method for instructing a UE to transmit an SRS in a sub-frame of a downlink transmission burst is provided.
到本实施例中,用户设备UE在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中进行SRS传输时,确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置的方法,包括:The method for determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, when the user equipment UE performs the SRS transmission in the downlink subframe of the downlink transmission burst, in this embodiment, includes:
方法一:利用不同符号数目与SRS传输的时域符号位置,或,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置建立的对应关系表格,通过表格中对应的索引号确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置。Method 1: determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission by using a corresponding index number in the table by using a corresponding relationship table between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or Candidate time domain symbol location for SRS transmission.
其中,among them,
不同符号数目与SRS传输的时域符号位置,或,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置建立的对应关系表格的获取方式,包括:基站和UE事先约定;高层RRC信令配置;或者,物理层DCI信令配置,或者,预定义方式。The manner of obtaining the correspondence table between the number of different symbols and the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, includes: the base station and the UE agree in advance; the upper layer RRC signaling configuration; or, the physical layer DCI Signaling configuration, or, in a predefined manner.
索引号的获取方式,包括:高层RRC信令配置索引号;或者,物理层DCI信令配置索引号;或者,高层RRC信令配置索引号,且通过物理层DCI触发高层RRC信令配置的索引号生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置索引号,且在下行传输burst结束部分子帧之后生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置索引号,且在上行传输burst内生效;或者,第一物理层DCI触发SRS传输,第二物理层DCI信令配置索引号。其中,通过配置索引号的第二物理层DCI信令发送的子帧号,以及特定的定时关系可以确定索引号生效的子帧位置。 The index number is obtained, including: a high-level RRC signaling configuration index number; or a physical layer DCI signaling configuration index number; or a high-layer RRC signaling configuration index number, and an index of the upper layer RRC signaling configuration triggered by the physical layer DCI The first layer takes effect; or the upper layer RRC signaling configures the index number and takes effect after the downlink transmission burst ends the subframe; or the upper layer RRC signaling configures the index number and takes effect in the uplink transmission burst; or, the first physical layer DCI The SRS transmission is triggered, and the second physical layer DCI signaling configures an index number. The sub-frame number sent by the second physical layer DCI signaling of the index number and the specific timing relationship may determine the subframe position where the index number is valid.
方法二:通过显示的方式确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置。Method 2: Determine the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission by means of display, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission.
显示的方式,包括:The way to display, including:
由高层RRC信令配置,其中:Configured by high-level RRC signaling, where:
通过高层RRC信令,配置SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,Configuring a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or a candidate time domain symbol position by high layer RRC signaling; or
通过高层RRC信令,配置SRS传输的周期和偏移量(这里的SRS传输的周期的基本单位是符号),由SRS传输的周期和偏移来确定一个子帧中传输SRS的时域符号位置,或者,传输SRS的候选时域符号位置;其中,SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置所在的子帧也可以通过高层RRC信令配置。或者,The period and offset of the SRS transmission are configured by the upper layer RRC signaling (the basic unit of the period of the SRS transmission is a symbol), and the time domain symbol position of the transmitted SRS in one subframe is determined by the period and offset of the SRS transmission. Or, the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted; wherein the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the subframe in which the candidate time domain symbol position is located may also be configured by high layer RRC signaling. or,
通过高层RRC信令,配置SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置(符号位置,或者,时域子帧位置),和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔(SRS时域资源可以是时域符号资源,或者,时域子帧资源),由高层RRC配置的信息确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置。或者,The time window length of the SRS transmission is configured by the upper layer RRC signaling, and/or the start position (symbol position, or time domain subframe position) of the SRS transmission time window, and/or, within the time window of the SRS transmission Offset, and/or SRS time domain resource interval in the time window of the SRS transmission (the SRS time domain resource may be a time domain symbol resource or a time domain subframe resource), and the information configured by the upper layer RRC determines the SRS transmission. Time domain symbol position, or candidate time domain symbol position. or,
通过高层RRC信令,配置SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,Configuring high-frequency RRC signaling, configuring a start of a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain of the SRS transmission The number of symbols determines the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
由物理层DCI信令配置,其中:Configured by physical layer DCI signaling, where:
物理层DCI信令(比如,UE专有DCI信令,比如,DCI format 0/4;或者,公共DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1C;或者,组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,比如,DCI format 3/3A;或者,下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D;或者,新DCI信令,比如,除了已有DCI foramt以外的新的格式;),配置SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置,其中,在物理层DCI信令中增加用于指示SRS传输 的时域位置或候选的时域位置的字段;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling (eg, UE-specific DCI signaling, eg, DCI format 0/4; or, common DCI signaling, eg, DCI format 1C; or, group downlink control information, Group DCI signaling, eg, DCI Format 3/3A; or downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D; or, new DCI signaling, for example, a new format other than DCI foramt; Configuring a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or a candidate time domain symbol position, wherein an SRS transmission is added in the physical layer DCI signaling. Field of time domain location or candidate time domain location; or,
物理层DCI信令,配置SRS传输的时域符号起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling, configuring a time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission, and/or a time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or a number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission determining a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or , the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
物理层DCI信令,配置SRS传输的周期和偏移量(这里的SRS传输的周期的基本单位是符号),由SRS传输的周期和偏移来确定子帧中传输SRS的时域符号位置,或者,传输SRS的候选时域符号位置。其中,SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置所在的子帧也可以通过物理层DCI信令配置;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling, configuring the period and offset of the SRS transmission (where the basic unit of the SRS transmission period is a symbol), and determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmitted in the subframe by the period and offset of the SRS transmission, Alternatively, the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted. The time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the subframe in which the candidate time domain symbol position is located may also be configured by physical layer DCI signaling; or
物理层DCI信令,配置SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置(符号位置,或者,时域子帧位置),和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔(SRS时域资源可以是时域符号资源,或者,时域子帧资源),由物理层DCI信令配置的信息确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling, configuring the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the starting position (symbol position, or time domain subframe position) of the SRS transmission time window, and/or, within the time window of the SRS transmission Offset, and/or SRS time domain resource interval in the time window of SRS transmission (SRS time domain resource may be time domain symbol resource, or time domain subframe resource), determined by information configured by physical layer DCI signaling The time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position; or,
由高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合方式配置,其中:Configured by a combination of high-layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling, where:
高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,通过物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的消息生效;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window The starting position, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or The time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, and the message triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling to trigger the high layer RRC signaling configuration takes effect; or,
高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,通过物理层DCI信令 触发高层RRC信令配置的消息生效,且触发SRS可以进行一次传输,或者,多个传输;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window The starting position, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or , the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, through the physical layer DCI signaling The message triggering the configuration of the upper layer RRC signaling takes effect, and the SRS is triggered to perform one transmission, or multiple transmissions; or,
高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,在上行传输burst内,或者,在下行传输burst结束末尾部分子帧内生效;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window The starting position, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or , the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, within the uplink transmission burst, or at the end of the downlink transmission burst end Effective within the frame; or,
高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS在候选的时域符号位置进行一次传输或N次传输;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window The starting position, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or , the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, triggering the SRS in the candidate time domain symbol position by the physical layer DCI signaling One transmission or N transmissions; or,
高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,通过物理层DCI信令触发和/或配置SRS传输的时域符号位置;或者,候选的时域符号位置;或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目。或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission; or the candidate time domain symbol position; or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window The starting position, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or , the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, triggering and/or configuring the time domain of the SRS transmission by physical layer DCI signaling Symbol position; or, candidate time domain symbol position; or, period and offset of SRS transmission; or, time window length of SRS transmission, and/or, starting position of SRS transmission time window, and/or SRS The offset within the time window of the transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or the end of the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission, And/or, the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, / Or the number of the SRS transmission time domain symbol. or,
由N次物理层DCI信令结合方式配置,其中: Configured by N physical layer DCI signaling combination, where:
第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,第二物理层DCI信令触发第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息生效;或者,The first physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time The starting position of the window, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource interval within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, the start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and / Or, the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, the second physical layer DCI signaling triggering the first physical layer DCI signaling The configured information takes effect; or,
第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,第二物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目;或者,The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, the second physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or, the SRS transmission The length of the time window, and/or the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource spacing within the time window of the SRS transmission; or The start of the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission; or
物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号数目,物理层DCI信令配置的消息在下行传输burst结束末尾部分子帧,或者,上行传输burst内生效。The physical layer DCI signaling configures the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or the time window length of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS transmission time window a starting location, and/or an offset within a time window of the SRS transmission, and/or an SRS time domain resource interval within a time window of the SRS transmission; or, a start of a time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, and/or, The time domain symbol end position of the SRS transmission, and/or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and/or the number of time domain symbols of the SRS transmission, the message of the physical layer DCI signaling configuration is at the end of the downlink transmission burst end subframe Or, the uplink transmission burst is valid.
方法三:通过隐式的方式确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的候选时域符号位置。Method 3: Determine the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission in an implicit manner, or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission.
根据下行传输burst结束末尾部分子帧中剩余符号数目,隐含确定传输SRS的符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置,或者,SRS传输的周期和偏移量;或者,SRS传输的时间窗长度,和/或,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内的偏移量,和/或,SRS传输的时间窗内SRS时域资源间隔;或者,SRS传输的时域符号位置起点,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号结束位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号间隔,和/或,SRS传 输的时域符号数目。例如,下行传输burst结束末尾部分子帧中剩余符号数目为6时,隐含确定SRS传输的符号位置为:符号索引#13或符号索引#12或符号索引#11或符号索引#10等,或者,隐含确定候选的时域符号位置为:符号索引#13,符号索引#11,符号索引#9或者符号索引#10,符号索引#12,或者,隐含确定SRS传输的周期为和偏移量从而确定SRS符号位置,或候选的时域符号位置,例如,对于6个符号时,由周期2和偏移量为2确定的时域符号位置为10和12。其中,周期小于符号数目,偏移量为小于等于0,大于等于符号数目。这里,符号数目可以为下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数目。或者,隐含确定SRS传输的时域符号起始位置,例如,对于6个符号时,SRS传输的时域符号起始位置为符号索引为10。其中,即剩余符号数目与SRS传输的时域符号起始位置之间有一个偏移量,通过这个偏移量确定起始SRS传输的时域符号起始位置,偏移量可以是基站和UE事先约定,或者,高层RRC信令配置,或者,物理层DCI信令配置。Determining, according to the number of remaining symbols in the end portion of the downlink transmission burst, the symbol position of the transmitted SRS, or the candidate time domain symbol position, or the period and offset of the SRS transmission; or, the time window of the SRS transmission Length, and/or, the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, and/or the offset within the time window of the SRS transmission, and/or the SRS time domain resource spacing within the time window of the SRS transmission; or, SRS transmission The start of the time domain symbol position, and / or the end of the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission, and / or the time domain symbol interval of the SRS transmission, and / or, SRS transmission The number of time domain symbols lost. For example, when the number of remaining symbols in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst is 6, it is implicitly determined that the symbol position of the SRS transmission is: symbol index #13 or symbol index #12 or symbol index #11 or symbol index #10, or the like, or The time domain symbol position implicitly determining the candidate is: symbol index #13, symbol index #11, symbol index #9 or symbol index #10, symbol index #12, or implicitly determining the period and offset of the SRS transmission. The amount thus determines the SRS symbol position, or the candidate time domain symbol position, for example, for 6 symbols, the time domain symbol positions determined by period 2 and offset 2 are 10 and 12. Wherein, the period is less than the number of symbols, and the offset is less than or equal to 0, and is greater than or equal to the number of symbols. Here, the number of symbols may be the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst. Alternatively, the time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission is implicitly determined. For example, for 6 symbols, the time domain symbol start position of the SRS transmission is a symbol index of 10. Wherein, there is an offset between the number of remaining symbols and the start position of the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission, and the offset of the time domain symbol of the initial SRS transmission is determined by the offset, and the offset may be the base station and the UE. Prior agreement, or high-level RRC signaling configuration, or physical layer DCI signaling configuration.
此外,确定用于传输SRS的时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置所属的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的方法,包括:In addition, a method for determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position to which a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS is transmitted includes:
方案一:通过高层RRC信令配置。其中,Solution 1: Configuration through high-level RRC signaling. among them,
通过高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;或者,Determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using high layer RRC signaling to configure parameters for SRS transmission; or
高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,一经配置立即生效;或者,The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are effective immediately upon configuration; or,
高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,在上行传输burst期间生效;The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst;
其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。The parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset Shift, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
方案二:通过物理层DCI信令配置。其中, Solution 2: Configuration through physical layer DCI signaling. among them,
触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照预定定时关系,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;The physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship;
在物理层DCI信令中携带指示时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置。The physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position, and determines a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
其中,预定定时关系包括:n+k;或者,n+k1;k为大于等于4的正整数;k1为大于等于0的正整数。k或k1可以通过以下方式至少之一获取:高层RRC信令配置;物理层DCI信令指示;基站和UE事先约定方式。The predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; and k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to zero. The k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following methods: a high layer RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
方案三:通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式。其中,Solution 3: A combination of high-level RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling. among them,
高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数生效;The high-layer RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, and the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the physical layer DCI signaling triggering the high-layer RRC signaling are valid;
高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令配置高层RRC信令未配置的SRS传输的参数;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the unconfigured SRS transmission of the upper layer RRC signaling;
高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令中携带指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;The high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and is determined according to the field for the SRS. The time domain subframe position of the transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position;
高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和/或按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission and/or determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for the SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship. ;
其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。The parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window offset Shift, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
方案四:通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式。其中,Solution 4: A method of combining DC physical signaling by N times. among them,
由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or Triggering SRS transmission by using a second physical layer DCI signaling;
由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示 SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;SRS transmission triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission;
由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令,按照预定定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置使能。Determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship by the first physical layer DCI signaling, triggering the SRS transmission by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or passing the second physical layer The DCI signaling triggers the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position enable of the SRS transmission determined by the first physical layer DCI signaling.
方案五:通过隐含方式。其中,Option 5: Through implicit means. among them,
下行传输burst结束之后,和/或,上行传输burst内使能高层RRC信令配置的SRS参数或物理层DCI信令明确指示的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,其中,SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输;After the downlink transmission burst ends, and/or, the SRS parameter configured by the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled in the uplink transmission burst, where The parameters of the SRS transmission include at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, a symbol index of the LBT, a time domain pattern of the SRS transmission, a time window of the SRS transmission, and an offset within the time window. Time window interval, the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmissions;
下行传输burst之后的末尾部分子帧;The last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst;
下行传输burst之后,第一个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the first uplink subframe;
下行传输burst之后,第二个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe;
下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe;
上行传输burst中第一个上行子帧;The first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
上行传输burst中第二个上行子帧;The second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧。The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe.
此外,上述配置信令(如,高层RRC信令,物理层DCI信令)也可以同时配置SRS传输的时域子帧或候选子帧的方法和/或配置SRS传输的时域 符号位置或候选时域符号位置。In addition, the foregoing configuration signaling (eg, high-layer RRC signaling, physical layer DCI signaling) may also simultaneously configure a time domain subframe or a candidate subframe of the SRS transmission and/or configure a time domain of the SRS transmission. Symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position.
可以通过N次物理层DCI信令方式触发和/或确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置和/或SRS传输的时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置。N可以为大于等于1的正整数,例如,N为2。N可以有物理层DCI信令,或,RRC信令配置,或者,基站和UE事先约定,或,预定义方式获取或确定。The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission and/or the time domain symbol position or the candidate time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission may be triggered and/or determined by N physical layer DCI signaling manners. N may be a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, N is 2. The N may have physical layer DCI signaling, or RRC signaling configuration, or the base station and the UE agree in advance, or obtain or determine in a predefined manner.
可以通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,再通过二次物理层DCI信令(如,公共DCI信令,即DCI format 1C)确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号位置或候选的时域符号位置。或者,The SRS transmission may be triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission may be determined by the secondary physical layer DCI signaling (eg, the common DCI signaling, that is, the DCI format 1C). And/or, the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain symbol position. or,
可以通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,且触发信令发送子帧和SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置之间按照特定的定时关系确定,而通过二次物理层DCI信令(如,公共DCI信令,即DCI format 1C)配置SRS传输的时域符号位置或候选的时域符号位置。The SRS transmission may be triggered by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the trigger signaling subframe and the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a specific timing relationship, and the secondary physical layer is adopted. The DCI signaling (e.g., the common DCI signaling, DCI format 1C) configures the time domain symbol location or the candidate time domain symbol location of the SRS transmission.
可以通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输并指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置,而通过二次物理层DCI信令(如,公共DCI信令,即DCI format 1C)配置SRS传输的时域符号位置或候选的时域符号位置。The SRS transmission may be triggered by physical layer DCI signaling and indicate the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and the secondary physical layer DCI signaling (eg, common DCI signaling, ie DCI format 1C) ) Configure the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain symbol position.
本发明实施例中物理层DCI信令,包括以下之一:UE专有DCI信令,比如,DCI format 0/4;或者,公共DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1C;或者,组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,比如,DCI format 3/3A;或者,下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,比如,DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D;或者,新DCI信令,比如,除了已有DCI foramt以外的新的格式;即可以在物理层DCI信令中增加指示SRS时域子帧,或,候选SRS时域子帧字段,和/或,增加指示SRS传输的时域符号位置,或,候选的SRS时域符号位置字段,和/或,增加用于触发SRS进行一次传输,或,多次传输的字段,和/或,增加指示定时关系的k值的字段。在一实施方式中,也可以增加配置SRS传输的传输梳齿字段,和/或,循环移位。The physical layer DCI signaling in the embodiment of the present invention includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 0/4; or common DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 1C; or group downlink control information. Group DCI signaling, for example, DCI format 3/3A; or downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, such as DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D; or, new DCI signaling, for example, except a new format other than the DCI foramt; that is, an SRS time domain subframe, or a candidate SRS time domain subframe field may be added in the physical layer DCI signaling, and/or a time domain symbol position indicating the SRS transmission may be added, or a candidate SRS time domain symbol location field, and/or a field for triggering the SRS to perform a transmission, or multiple transmissions, and/or a field to increase the k value indicating the timing relationship. In an embodiment, it is also possible to increase the transmission comb field of the configuration SRS transmission, and/or cyclic shift.
下面将进一步详细说明上述方法: The above method will be described in further detail below:
由高层RRC配置索引号,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输。The index number is configured by the upper layer RRC, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission.
其中,高层RRC信令配置索引号对应的SRS时域传输位置或SRS传输的候选时域位置包括两种:一种是一经高层RRC信令配置立即生效;另一种是通过物理层DCI信令触发其生效。The SRS time domain transmission location corresponding to the high-level RRC signaling configuration index number or the candidate time domain location of the SRS transmission includes two types: one is effective immediately after the high-layer RRC signaling configuration; and the other is through the physical layer DCI signaling. Trigger it to take effect.
高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域传输位置对应的索引号为实施例1中定义的表中的索引。The index number corresponding to the SRS time domain transmission location of the high layer RRC signaling configuration is the index in the table defined in Embodiment 1.
在一实施方式中,触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n,按照n+k定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,SRS传输的时域子帧集合位置,或者,索引号生效的子帧位置。其中,k可以为一个正整数,或者,k可以为一个正整数集合。k可以为大于等于0的正整数,或者,大于等于4的正整数,或者,k为0,和/或,1,和/或,2,和/或,3,和/或,4,和/或,5,和/或,6,和/或,7,或者,k为一个集合,如{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}。In an embodiment, the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission determines the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to the n+k timing relationship in the subframe n, or the time domain subframe set location of the SRS transmission, or The position of the subframe where the index number is in effect. Where k can be a positive integer, or k can be a positive integer set. k may be a positive integer greater than or equal to 0, or a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, or k is 0, and/or, 1, and/or, 2, and/or, 3, and/or 4, and / or, 5, and / or, 6, and / or, 7, or, k is a set, such as {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}.
物理层DCI信令,包括:UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令);或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C);或者,group(组)DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A);或者,DL grant(授权)(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令。Physical layer DCI signaling, including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group (group) DCI signaling (eg, Format 3/3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
为了便于理解方式一,通过举例方式说明:To facilitate understanding of the first method, by way of example:
举例1:高层RRC信令配置表1中序列号3(即高层RRC配置子帧中OFDM符号索引号为13的位置为SRS传输时域符号位置)。SRS在哪个时域子帧上传输通过物理层DCI信令,或者,通过沿用高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域位置。Example 1: The RRC signaling configuration table 1 has the sequence number 3 (that is, the position of the OFDM symbol index number 13 in the high-layer RRC configuration subframe is the SRS transmission time domain symbol position). The SRS is transmitted over the physical layer DCI signaling on which time domain subframes, or by configuring the time domain location of the SRS transmission by using higher layer RRC signaling.
若触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令,如,UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令),或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A),或者,DLgrant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令在子帧n发送,按照LTE协议中的n+k1(其中,k1为4)定时关系,确定SRS传输的时域位置。进一步,按照n+k1定时关系确定的SRS传输时域子帧为下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧,触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令应该在下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧 开始,向前的k1个子帧上发送。图3是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k确定SRS传输时域子帧位置的示意图,如图3所示,为了确保SRS在下行传输burst结束的末尾部分子帧上传输,触发SRS传输的DCI信令发送的子帧的示意图。If the physical layer DCI signaling of the SRS transmission is triggered, such as UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling), or group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A), or DL grant (eg, , format 1A/2B/2C) signaling is transmitted in subframe n, and the time domain position of the SRS transmission is determined according to the timing relationship of n+k1 (where k1 is 4) in the LTE protocol. Further, the SRS transmission time domain subframe determined according to the n+k1 timing relationship is the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst end, and the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission should be at the end of the downlink transmission burst end subframe. Start, send on the forward k1 subframes. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, in order to ensure that an SRS is transmitted on a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst, Schematic diagram of a subframe transmitted by DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission.
由图3,按照LTE协议中触发SRS传输的DCI信令发送在子帧n,按照n+4定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,在一实施方式中,按照高层RRC信令配置的SRS传输符号位置,UE在SRS传输的时域子帧中的符号位置上传输SRS的前提为:在SRS符号位置之前执行LBT机制,若UE在SRS符号位置之前执行LBT成功,则UE在的SRS符号上传输SRS。反之,若UE在SRS符号位置之前执行LBT失败,则UE在的SRS符号上不传输SRS。或者,UE在SRS符号位置之前不执行LBT,只要下行传输burst结束位置至SRS符号位置之间的gap不大于16us,或者,25us。若SRS传输的符号位置所在的子帧位于MCOT(MCOT可以认为是下行传输burst+上行传输burst,或者,MCOT认为是独立的下行传输burst,或者,MCOT认为是独立的上行传输burst)内,则在SRS传输的时域符号之前执行25us的Cat2LBT。若SRS传输的符号位置所在的子帧位于MCOT(MCOT可以认为是下行传输burst+上行传输burst,或者,MCOT认为是独立的下行传输burst,或者,MCOT认为是独立的上行传输burst)外,或者,位于MCOT内的第一个子帧,则在的SRS传输的时域符号或子帧之前执行Cat4LBT。可以配置优先级高的LBT优先级,比如,优先级等级1(如,最大竞争窗为5,最小竞争窗0,defer period中的n为0,或,1,或,2),或,优先级等级2(如,最大竞争窗为7,最小竞争窗3,defer period中的n为0,或,1,或,2)。在一实施方式中,上行信号或信道的优先级为:SRS>PUSCH+SRS>PUSCH。或者,LBT机制中的参数n,和/或,随机回退值N由物理层DCI信令,或,高层RRC信令配置。As shown in FIG. 3, the DCI signaling for triggering the SRS transmission in the LTE protocol is transmitted in the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to the n+4 timing relationship. In an implementation manner, the uplink RRC signaling is configured. The SRS transmits the symbol position, and the UE transmits the SRS on the symbol position in the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission. The premise is that the LBT mechanism is performed before the SRS symbol position, and if the UE performs the LBT successfully before the SRS symbol position, the UE is in the SRS. The SRS is transmitted on the symbol. Conversely, if the UE fails to perform LBT before the SRS symbol position, the UE does not transmit the SRS on the SRS symbol. Alternatively, the UE does not perform LBT before the SRS symbol position, as long as the gap between the downlink transmission burst end position and the SRS symbol position is not greater than 16 us, or 25 us. If the subframe where the symbol position of the SRS transmission is located in the MCOT (the MCOT can be regarded as the downlink transmission burst+uplink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent downlink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent uplink transmission burst), then The 25-times Cat2LBT is executed before the time domain symbol of the SRS transmission. If the subframe where the symbol position of the SRS transmission is located in the MCOT (the MCOT can be regarded as the downlink transmission burst+uplink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent downlink transmission burst, or the MCOT considers it to be an independent uplink transmission burst), or The first subframe located within the MCOT performs Cat4LBT before the time domain symbol or subframe of the SRS transmission. You can configure a higher priority LBT priority, for example, priority level 1 (for example, the maximum contention window is 5, the minimum contention window 0, n in the defer period is 0, or 1, 1, or 2), or, priority Level 2 (eg, the maximum contention window is 7, the minimum contention window 3, n in the defer period is 0, or, 1, or 2). In an embodiment, the priority of the uplink signal or channel is: SRS>PUSCH+SRS>PUSCH. Alternatively, the parameter n in the LBT mechanism, and/or the random backoff value N is configured by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
另一种情况:若触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令,如,UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令),或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A),或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令,或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C)在子帧n发送,按照新的n+k(其中,k为大于等于0,或 者,k为大于等于4的正整数)定时关系,确定SRS传输的时域位置。其中,k为0,1,2,3,4,5,6等。k为0表示触发SRS传输的DCI信令在子帧n上发送,且确定SRS传输的子帧也为子帧n。而若k为1,则表示触发SRS传输的DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照n+1关系确定SRS传输在子帧n+1上。此时,UE在确定的SRS传输时域子帧中哪个符号上传输由高层RRC信令确定。图4是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k1确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置的第一示意图;图5是根据本发明实施例的一种按照定时关系n+k1确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置的第二示意图;如图4所示,或,图5所示。Another case: if physical layer DCI signaling for SRS transmission is triggered, such as UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling), or group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A), Alternatively, a DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling, or a common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C) is transmitted in subframe n, according to a new n+k (where k is greater than or equal to 0, Or The k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4) timing relationship, and the time domain position of the SRS transmission is determined. Where k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. A k of 0 indicates that DCI signaling for triggering the SRS transmission is transmitted on the subframe n, and it is determined that the subframe of the SRS transmission is also the subframe n. If k is 1, it means that the DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the SRS transmission is determined to be on the subframe n+1 according to the n+1 relationship. At this time, which symbol in the determined SRS transmission time domain subframe is transmitted by the UE is determined by the upper layer RRC signaling. 4 is a first schematic diagram of determining a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 5 is a method for determining an SRS according to a timing relationship n+k1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; A second schematic diagram of the time domain subframe position of the transmission; as shown in FIG. 4, or as shown in FIG.
举例2:举例2与举例1不同之处在于,UE有多个候选的SRS传输时域符号位置。假定高层RRC信令配置表12中序列号174(即高层RRC配置子帧中OFDM符号索引号为13,10,6,5的位置为候选的SRS传输时域符号位置)。SRS在哪个时域子帧上传输通过物理层DCI信令,或者,通过沿用高层RRC信令配置SRS传输的时域位置。其中,触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令,如,UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令),或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A),或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令,或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C)在子帧n发送,其确定SRS传输的时域位置的定时关系,可以按照已有的n+4,或者,按照新的n+k(其中,k为大于等于0,或者,k为大于等于4的正整数)定时关系,方法同举例1。Example 2: Example 2 differs from Example 1 in that the UE has multiple candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol positions. Assume that the sequence number 174 in the high-layer RRC signaling configuration table 12 (ie, the position of the OFDM symbol index number in the high-layer RRC configuration subframe is 13, 10, 6, 5 is the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position). The SRS is transmitted over the physical layer DCI signaling on which time domain subframes, or by configuring the time domain location of the SRS transmission by using higher layer RRC signaling. Wherein, physical layer DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission, such as UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling), or group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A), or DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling, or common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C) is transmitted in subframe n, which determines the timing relationship of the time domain location of the SRS transmission, which may be in accordance with the existing n+ 4, or, according to the new n + k (where k is greater than or equal to 0, or, k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4) timing relationship, the method is the same as the example 1.
在一实施方式中,在候选的SRS传输时域符号位置,若UE在第一个候选的符号位置之前执行LBT成功,则UE在第一个符号位置上传输SRS。反之,若UE在第一个候选的符号位置之前执行LBT失败(LBT机制LBTCat4,且最大竞争窗为5,最小竞争窗为1,defer period中n为1。或者,LBT机制为25us的Cat2),则UE放弃在第一个符号位置上传输SRS。继续尝试在下一个候选的SRS符号位置之前执行LBT(此时在下一个候选的SRS符号位置之前执行LBT机制可以与前一个SRS符号位置之前执行的LBT机制相同,或者,比前一个SRS符号位置之前执行的LBT机制更加简化,或,更快接入信道的LBT机制或参数(LBT机制LBT Cat4,且最大竞 争窗为3,最小竞争窗为0,defer period中n为0,或,1,或者,LBT机制为25us的Cat2)),若执行LBT成功,则UE在当前的SRS符号上传输。反之,LBT失败,UE继续尝试在下一个SRS符号位置之前执行LBT。重复上述方法。其中,所UE在候选的SRS符号中之一上成功发送SRS,其他候选的传输SRS的符号位置对于该UE失效,或者,该UE继续在候选的SRS符号位置之前执行LBT,在LBT成功的前提下,发送SRS。In an embodiment, in the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position, if the UE performs LBT success before the first candidate symbol position, the UE transmits the SRS on the first symbol position. Conversely, if the UE performs LBT failure before the first candidate symbol position (LBT mechanism LBTCat4, and the maximum contention window is 5, the minimum contention window is 1, n is 1 in the defer period. Or, the LBT mechanism is 25us Cat2) Then, the UE abandons the transmission of the SRS at the first symbol position. Continue to attempt to perform LBT before the next candidate SRS symbol position (this time the LBT mechanism performed before the next candidate SRS symbol position may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed before the previous SRS symbol position, or before the previous SRS symbol position) The LBT mechanism is more simplified, or the LBT mechanism or parameters of the faster access channel (LBT mechanism LBT Cat4, and the largest competition) The contention window is 3, the minimum contention window is 0, n is 0 in the defer period, or 1, or the LBT mechanism is 25us Cat2)). If the LBT is successful, the UE transmits on the current SRS symbol. Conversely, the LBT fails and the UE continues to attempt to perform LBT before the next SRS symbol position. Repeat the above method. The UE successfully transmits the SRS on one of the candidate SRS symbols, and the symbol position of the other candidate transmission SRS is invalid for the UE, or the UE continues to perform the LBT before the candidate SRS symbol position, and the LBT succeeds. Next, send the SRS.
此外,由于SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的符号位置是高层RRC配置的,该配置所确定的SRS传输符号位置中至少之一可能是下行部分子帧中的符号,或者,UE侧LBT失败导致配置的SRS符号位置可能不能传输。这一定程度上限制了SRS在部分子帧中传输的机会。In addition, due to the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the symbol position of the candidate SRS transmission is configured by the upper layer RRC, at least one of the SRS transmission symbol positions determined by the configuration may be a symbol in the downlink partial subframe, or the UE A side LBT failure causes the configured SRS symbol location to be undeliverable. This limits the chances of SRS transmission in partial subframes to some extent.
方式二:物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,并且通知SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置。Manner 2: The physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and notifies the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position.
其中,通过DCI信令确定SRS传输时域子帧,或,SRS传输时域子帧集合位置是通过特定的定时关系。特定定时关系包括下述之一:LTE协议中的n+4定时关系;或者,按照新的定义关系n+k。其中,k为大于等于0,或者,k为大于等于4的正整数,例如,k为0,1,2,3,4,5,6等。通过定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置的方法同方法一中。特定的定时关系中参数k可以由物理层DCI信令,或者,高层RRC信令确定。The SRS transmission time domain subframe is determined by DCI signaling, or the SRS transmission time domain subframe collection location passes a specific timing relationship. The specific timing relationship includes one of the following: an n+4 timing relationship in the LTE protocol; or, according to a new definition relationship n+k. Where k is greater than or equal to 0, or k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, for example, k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method. The parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
与方法一不同之处在于,由基站通过DCI信令通知UESRS传输的时域子帧中的哪个,或者,哪些符号上传输SRS。其中,基站仅需要通知实施例中表格中的序列索引号,即可知道SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输时域符号位置。The difference from the method one is that the base station notifies which of the time domain subframes transmitted by the UESRS through the DCI signaling, or which symbols transmit the SRS. The base station only needs to notify the sequence index number in the table in the embodiment to know the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission time domain symbol position.
对于方式二,基站可以知道下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数,从而可以从实施例1中表格中为UE通知对应剩余符号数目对应的SRS传输符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置。For mode 2, the base station can know the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, so that the UE can be notified from the table in Embodiment 1 of the SRS transmission symbol position corresponding to the number of remaining symbols, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol. position.
方式三:物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,UE可以通过检查的公共DCI获取的剩余符号数隐含确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的时域符号位置。 Manner 3: The physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the number of remaining symbols acquired by the UE through the checked common DCI implicitly determines the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the time domain symbol position of the candidate SRS transmission.
对于方式三,可以通过一个物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,而SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或,候选的SRS传输时域子帧位置依然可以通过特定的定时关系确定。其中,的特定的定时关系为下述之一:For mode 3, the SRS transmission can be triggered by one physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission time domain subframe position can still be determined by a specific timing relationship. Among them, the specific timing relationship is one of the following:
LTE协议中的n+4定时关系;或者,n+4 timing relationship in the LTE protocol; or,
按照新的定义关系n+k。According to the new definition relationship n + k.
其中,k为大于等于0,或者,k为大于等于4的正整数,例如,k为0,1,2,3,4,5,6等。通过定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置的方法同方法一中。特定的定时关系中参数k可以由物理层DCI信令,或者,高层RRC信令确定。Where k is greater than or equal to 0, or k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, for example, k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method. The parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
进一步地,UE在下行末尾部分子帧中传输SRS的符号位置可以根据UE检查到的公共DCI信令所知的剩余符号数来隐含确定,或者,预定义的方式确定,或者,基站和UE事先约定的方式确定。Further, the symbol position of the UE transmitting the SRS in the downlink end subframe may be implicitly determined according to the number of remaining symbols known by the common DCI signaling checked by the UE, or determined in a predefined manner, or the base station and the UE Determined in advance by way of agreement.
隐含确定传输SRS的符号位置,包括以下之一:下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的最后一个符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的倒数第二个符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的第一个符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的第二个符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的第三个符号,或者,特定的一个符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的符号索引为偶数的符号,或者,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中的符号索引为奇数的符号,或者,特定的符号集合。Implicitly determining the symbol position of the transmitted SRS, including one of the following: the last symbol in the last part of the downlink transmission burst, or the second to last symbol in the last part of the downlink transmission burst, or downlink transmission The first symbol in the subframe at the end of the burst, or the second symbol in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, or the third symbol in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, or One symbol, or the symbol index in the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst is an even symbol, or the symbol index in the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst is an odd symbol, or a specific symbol set.
特定的一个符号,或者,特定的符号集合,可以通过基站和UE事先约定,或者,预定义方式,或者,高层RRC配置,或者,物理层DCI通知。A specific symbol, or a specific symbol set, may be previously agreed by the base station and the UE, or a predefined manner, or a high layer RRC configuration, or a physical layer DCI notification.
例如,下行传输burst的末尾部分子帧中剩余符号为3个时,UE可以根据剩余的3个符号隐含确定剩余的3个符号中最后一个符号,或者,第一个符号,或者,第二个符号,或者,第一个符号和第三个符号,或者,第二个符号和第三个符号为SRS传输的时域符号位置。For example, when there are three remaining symbols in the last partial subframe of the downlink transmission burst, the UE may implicitly determine the last one of the remaining three symbols, or the first symbol, or the second, according to the remaining three symbols. The symbols, or the first symbol and the third symbol, or the second symbol and the third symbol are the time domain symbol positions of the SRS transmission.
方式四:第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,第二物理层DCI指示SRS传输的序列索引。Manner 4: The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the second physical layer DCI indicates the sequence index of the SRS transmission.
其中,第一个物理层DCI信令仅触发SRS传输,而通过第二物理层 DCI确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,和,SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置。图6是根据本发明实施例的第一DCI信令触发SRS传输,第二DCI信令按照n+k或n+k1定时关系确定的SRS传输的时域子帧位置和/或SRS传输的时域符号位置的示意图,如图6所示。The first physical layer DCI signaling only triggers the SRS transmission but passes through the second physical layer. The DCI determines the time domain subframe or candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and, the symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position. 6 is a first DCI signaling trigger SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention. The second DCI signaling is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship, and the time domain subframe position and/or SRS transmission time of the SRS transmission is determined according to an n+k or n+k1 timing relationship. A schematic diagram of the location of the domain symbol, as shown in Figure 6.
第一物理层DCI信令发送的时域子帧位于第二物理层DCI信令发送时域子帧位置之前。在一实施方式中,第一物理层DCI信令发送的时域子帧也可以位于第二物理层DCI信令发送时域子帧位置之后。也就是说,前者是先触发SRS传输,而SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的时域子帧位置,和,SRS传输的序列索引号是由二次物理层DCI通知给UE。SRS传输的序列索引为实施例1中表格中的的序列索引号。而后者是先通过一个物理层DCI信令通知UE按照特定的定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的时域子帧位置,和,SRS传输的序列索引号,而通过第二个物理层DCI信令触发第一个物理层DCI信令配置的SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输的时域子帧位置,和,SRS传输的序列索引号使能。The time domain subframe sent by the first physical layer DCI signaling is located before the second physical layer DCI signaling transmission time domain subframe position. In an embodiment, the time domain subframe sent by the first physical layer DCI signaling may also be located after the second physical layer DCI signaling transmission time domain subframe position. That is to say, the former triggers the SRS transmission first, and the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index number of the SRS transmission are notified by the secondary physical layer DCI. Give the UE. The sequence index of the SRS transmission is the sequence index number in the table in Embodiment 1. The latter firstly informs the UE through a physical layer DCI signaling to determine the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index number of the SRS transmission. And the second physical layer DCI signaling triggers the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, or the time domain subframe position of the candidate SRS transmission, and the sequence index of the SRS transmission The number is enabled.
此外,另一种情况,第一物理层DCI信令,和/或,第二物理层DCI信令中可以通过特定的定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置。其中,特定的定时关系为下述之一:LTE协议中的n+4定时关系;或者,按照新的定义关系n+k。k为大于等于0,或者,k为大于等于4的正整数,例如,k为0,1,2,3,4,5,6等。通过定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置的方法同方法一中。特定的定时关系中参数k可以由物理层DCI信令,或者,高层RRC信令确定。In addition, in another case, the first physical layer DCI signaling, and/or the second physical layer DCI signaling may determine a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by using a specific timing relationship. The specific timing relationship is one of the following: an n+4 timing relationship in the LTE protocol; or, according to a new definition relationship n+k. k is greater than or equal to 0, or k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4, for example, k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the timing relationship, or the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position in the same manner as in the first method. The parameter k in a specific timing relationship may be determined by physical layer DCI signaling, or higher layer RRC signaling.
图7是根据本发明实施例的的第一DCI信令触发SRS传输并按照n+k定时关系指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置,第二DCI信令按照n+k1定时关系确定SRS传输的时域符号位置的示意图,如图7所示,第一物理层DCI信令确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,而第二个物理层DCI指示SRS传输的符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置。7 is a first DCI signaling triggering SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention, and indicating a time domain subframe position of an SRS transmission according to an n+k timing relationship, where the second DCI signaling determines an SRS transmission according to an n+k1 timing relationship. Schematic diagram of the time domain symbol position, as shown in FIG. 7, the first physical layer DCI signaling determines the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and the second physical layer DCI indicates the symbol position of the SRS transmission. Or, the candidate SRS transmits the symbol position.
方式五:第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,第二物理层DCI指示UE 按照特定的定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,UE在下行burst末尾部分中传输的SRS的符号位置,或者,候选的传输SRS的符号位置可以通过UE检测的公共DCI信令获知的剩余符号数目隐含确定。Manner 5: The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers SRS transmission, and the second physical layer DCI indicates UE Determining a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to a specific timing relationship, a symbol position of the SRS transmitted by the UE in the end portion of the downlink burst, or a symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS may be detected by the UE. The number of remaining symbols learned by the public DCI signaling is implicitly determined.
根据第一个物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输是指UE可以在收到触发SRS传输信令之后的SRS传输时域子帧中传输SRS。而SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置是由第二物理层DCI信令按照特定的定时关系确定。The triggering of the SRS transmission according to the first physical layer DCI signaling means that the UE can transmit the SRS in the SRS transmission time domain subframe after receiving the triggering SRS transmission signaling. The time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by the second physical layer DCI signaling according to a specific timing relationship.
特定的定时关系,和,根据下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数隐含确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置的方法同本实施例中其他方法中的方法。a specific timing relationship, and, according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, implicitly determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the method of the candidate time domain symbol location is the same as in the other methods in this embodiment. method.
方式六:通过物理层DCI信令触发并明确通知SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,和/或,传输SRS的符号位置,或者,候选的传输SRS的符号位置。Manner 6: triggering and explicitly notifying the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position by the physical layer DCI signaling, and/or transmitting the symbol position of the SRS or the symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS.
其中,对于方式六包括两种情况:Among them, there are two cases for mode six:
情况一:通过物理层DCI信令明确通知SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置和SRS在SRS传输子帧中的符号位置,或者,候选的传输SRS的符号位置。Case 1: The physical layer DCI signaling explicitly informs the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position and the symbol position of the SRS in the SRS transmission subframe, or the symbol position of the candidate transmission SRS.
情况二:通过物理层DCI信令触发并明确通知SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,而SRS在下行burst末尾部分子帧中的符号位置,或者,候选的传输SRS的符号位置通过检测公共DCI信令获知剩余符号数隐含确定。Case 2: The time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is triggered and explicitly notified by the physical layer DCI signaling, and the symbol position of the SRS in the downlink subframe at the end of the downlink burst, or the candidate transmission SRS The symbol position is implicitly determined by detecting the number of remaining symbols by detecting the common DCI signaling.
隐含确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置的方法同本实施例中其他方法中的方法。The method of implicitly determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, is the same as the method in the other methods in this embodiment.
方法七:通过物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过隐含方式确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,和/或,传输SRS的符号位置,或者,候选的传输SRS的符号位置。Method 7: triggering SRS transmission by physical layer DCI signaling, determining a time domain subframe or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by an implicit manner, and/or transmitting a symbol position of the SRS, or a candidate transmission SRS Symbol location.
对于方法七,隐含方式确定SRS传输的时域子帧或候选的时域子帧位置,和/或,传输SRS的符号位置包括:下行传输burst末尾部分子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后第一个上行子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后第二个上 行子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧,或者,第一个上行子帧,和/或,第二个上行子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧。其中,下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧的数目与M有关。其中,M为下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,下行传输burst后的上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为偶数对应的子帧,和/或,上行子帧索引号为奇数对应的子帧的数目。M可以通过高层RRC信令配置,或者,物理层DCI信令通知,或者,基站和UE事先预定,或者,预定义方式确定。For method 7, the implicit manner determines the time domain subframe of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, and/or the symbol position of the transmission SRS includes: a downlink subframe at the end of the downlink transmission, and/or a downlink transmission burst After the first uplink subframe, and/or, after the downlink transmission burst, the second a subframe, and/or a subframe in which an uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an even number, and/or an uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an odd subframe, or first The uplink subframe, and/or the second uplink subframe, and/or the subframe in which the uplink subframe index number is an even number, and/or the subframe in which the uplink subframe index number is an odd number. The uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe, and/or the uplink subframe index number after the downlink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe, and/or the uplink subframe index number is The even-numbered subframes, and/or the number of subframes corresponding to the odd-numbered subframe index numbers, are related to M. Wherein, M is a subframe corresponding to an even subframe index of the downlink transmission burst, and/or a subframe corresponding to an odd subframe index of the uplink transmission burst, and/or an uplink subframe index The number is an even-numbered subframe, and/or the number of subframes in which the uplink subframe index number is an odd number. M may be configured by high-layer RRC signaling, or physical layer DCI signaling, or the base station and the UE may reserve in advance, or may be determined in a predefined manner.
隐含确定SRS传输的时域符号位置,或者,候选的时域符号位置的方法同本实施例中其他方法中的方法。The method of implicitly determining the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission, or the candidate time domain symbol position, is the same as the method in the other methods in this embodiment.
通过上述方式中之一确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置,和/或,SRS传输的时域符号位置。进一步地,不同UE可以配置相同的SRS传输符号位置,或者,候选的SRS传输符号位置。对于不同UE在相同的SRS时域符号上传输时,可以通过循环移位,和/或,传输梳齿来复用在相同的符号中。不同UE采用的循环移位,和/或,传输梳齿可以由高层RRC信令配置,和/或,物理层DCI信令配置。其中,循环移位取值范围[0~7],或者,[0,s1],传输梳齿取值范围为[0,1],或者,[0,3],或者,[0,s2]。其中,s1为大于等于7的正整数。s2为大于等于3的正整数。The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined by one of the above methods, and/or the time domain symbol position of the SRS transmission. Further, different UEs may configure the same SRS transmission symbol position, or the candidate SRS transmission symbol position. For different UEs to transmit on the same SRS time domain symbol, they can be multiplexed in the same symbol by cyclic shifting, and/or transmission combing. Cyclic shifts employed by different UEs, and/or transmission combs may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling. Among them, the cyclic shift value range [0~7], or [0, s1], the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] . Where s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7. S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
本发明实施例中的物理层DCI信令,包括:UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令);或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C);或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A);或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令。再此进行声明,其他实施例中可以直接用物理层DCI信令直接代表下述之一:UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令);或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C);或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A);或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令。 The physical layer DCI signaling in the embodiment of the present invention includes: UE-specific DCI signaling (for example, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (for example, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling. (eg, format 3/3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling. Again, it is stated that in other embodiments, one of the following may be directly represented by physical layer DCI signaling: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, public DCI signaling (eg, Format 1C); or, group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/3A); or DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
实施例3Example 3
在本实施例中,提供一种不同UE在不同的SRS符号位置,或者,相同的SRS符号位置,或者,相同的候选SRS符号位置上传输SRS的方法。In this embodiment, a method for transmitting SRS on different SRS symbol positions, or the same SRS symbol position, or the same candidate SRS symbol position is provided.
情况1:对于不同的UE配置相同的一个SRS符号位置情况,UE传输SRS的方法。Case 1: A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for the case where the same one SRS symbol position is configured for different UEs.
对于情况1,假定下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余符号为6个时,SRS传输符号为剩余6个符号中最后一个符号(如,符号索引#13),SRS传输的方式包括以下之一:For case 1, it is assumed that when the remaining symbols in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst are 6, the SRS transmission symbol is the last symbol of the remaining 6 symbols (eg, symbol index #13), and the manner of SRS transmission includes one of the following:
方式一:不同UE在SRS符号位置之前执行LBT,且引入自延迟机制。其中,自延迟可以在LBT机制中,或者,LBT机制末尾。图8是根据本发明实施例的不同UE配置相同的SRS传输的时域符号位置时,在LBT机制中引入自延迟操作的示意图,如图8所示,不同的UE可以配置相同的LBT机制,和/或,LBT参数集合。例如,UE1和UE2配置相同的LBT Cat4机制,且随机回退值N,defer period中的n。其中,自延迟机制可以UE检测N值递减到1时开始自延迟直到SRS符号之前,在SRS符号之前的9us只要UE检测到信道空闲可以发送SRS在SRS符号。或者,自延迟在N值递减到0后UE开始执行自延迟。其中,自延迟中最小粒度为9us,即自延迟时域长度为9us的整数倍,或者,是特定CCA(Clear Channel Assessment,空闲信道评估)时长的整数倍。特定CCA时长可以为16us,或者,25us。Manner 1: Different UEs perform LBT before the SRS symbol position and introduce a self-delay mechanism. Among them, the self-delay can be in the LBT mechanism, or at the end of the LBT mechanism. 8 is a schematic diagram of introducing a self-delay operation in an LBT mechanism when different UEs configure time-domain symbol positions of the same SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 8, different UEs may be configured with the same LBT mechanism. And/or, a collection of LBT parameters. For example, UE1 and UE2 configure the same LBT Cat4 mechanism with a random backoff value of N, n in the defer period. The self-delay mechanism may be that the UE detects that the N value is decremented to 1 and starts from the delay until the SRS symbol, and the 9s before the SRS symbol can transmit the SRS in the SRS symbol as long as the UE detects the channel idle. Alternatively, the self begins to perform a self-delay after the delay of the value of N decreases to zero. The minimum granularity of the self-delay is 9 us, that is, the self-delay time domain length is an integer multiple of 9 us, or is an integer multiple of the specific CCA (Clear Channel Assessment) duration. The specific CCA duration can be 16us, or 25us.
此外,不同UE可以采用Cat2LBT,在下行传输burst结束符号位置至SRS符号位置之间执行多次CCA时长。其中,执行CCA时长的次数等于下行传输burst结束符号位置至SRS符号位置时长除以CCA时长所得值取整。所下行传输burst结束符号位置至SRS符号位置时长不是CCA时长的整数倍,则在剩余的时长内UE执行一次剩余时长的CCA检测,其CCA时长为剩余的时长。CCA时长可以为16us,或者,25us,或者,34us,或者,43us。In addition, different UEs may use Cat2LBT to perform multiple CCA durations between the downlink transmission burst end symbol position and the SRS symbol position. The number of times the CCA duration is executed is equal to the value of the downlink transmission burst end symbol position to the SRS symbol position duration divided by the CCA duration. The downlink transmission symbol position to the SRS symbol position duration is not an integer multiple of the CCA duration, and the UE performs a CCA detection of the remaining duration for the remaining duration, and the CCA duration is the remaining duration. The CCA duration can be 16us, or 25us, or 34us, or 43us.
在一实施方式中,当下行传输burst结束时刻到SRS传输的符号位置之间的gap不大于16us,或者,25us时,UE可以不执行LBT机制直接发送SRS。 In an embodiment, when the gap between the downlink transmission burst end time and the symbol position of the SRS transmission is not greater than 16 us, or 25 us, the UE may directly send the SRS without performing the LBT mechanism.
方式二:下行末尾部分子帧中剩余符号结构:CCA gap1+占用信号+CCA gap2+SRS。其中,占用信号可以为format4PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel,物理随机接入信道)(或截短的PRACH),也可以是短结构的PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control CHannel,物理上行链路控制信道)。在一实施方式中,剩余符号结构中至少CCA gap1和CCA gap2中至少之一。图9是根据本发明实施例的下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中时域结构示意图,如图9所示,当下行传输burst结束时刻到占用信号开始发送之间的gap不大于16us,或者,25us时,UE可以不执行LBT机制直接发送占用信号。在一实施方式中,不同的UE发送的占用信号可以通过频分方式复用,或者,采用不同循环移位方式通过码分方式复用。即CCA gap1可以省略。进一步,不同UE在CCA gap2中可以采用相同的LBT机制,和/或,LBT参数集合进行信道的接入。Manner 2: Remaining symbol structure in the downlink sub-frame: CCA gap1+ occupation signal + CCA gap2+SRS. The occupant signal may be a format 4 PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) or a truncated PRACH, or may be a PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control CHannel). In an embodiment, at least one of CCA gap1 and CCA gap2 is in the remaining symbol structure. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a time domain structure in a subframe at the end of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, when the downlink transmission burst end time reaches the start of the occupation signal, the gap is not greater than 16 us, or 25 us. The UE may directly transmit the occupation signal without performing the LBT mechanism. In an embodiment, the occupied signals sent by different UEs may be multiplexed by frequency division, or may be multiplexed by code division by using different cyclic shift modes. That is, CCA gap1 can be omitted. Further, different UEs may use the same LBT mechanism in CCA gap2, and/or the LBT parameter set for channel access.
此外,不同UE配置相同的SRS符号位置,其中,不同UE在同一个SRS符号中传输可以采用不同的循环移位,和/或,不同的传输梳齿。不同UE采用的循环移位,和/或,传输梳齿可以由高层RRC信令配置,和/或,物理层DCI信令配置。其中,循环移位取值范围[0~7],或者,[0,s1],传输梳齿取值范围为[0,1],或者,[0,3],或者,[0,s2]。其中,s1为大于等于7的正整数。s2为大于等于3的正整数。In addition, different UEs are configured with the same SRS symbol position, wherein different UEs may transmit different cyclic shifts and/or different transmission combs in the same SRS symbol. Cyclic shifts employed by different UEs, and/or transmission combs may be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling. Among them, the cyclic shift value range [0~7], or [0, s1], the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] . Where s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7. S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
情况2:对于不同的UE配置不同的一个SRS符号位置情况,UE传输SRS的方法。Case 2: A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for a different one of the SRS symbol position cases for different UEs.
这里以下行传输burst中剩余的符号为例说明在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号中,不同UE配置不同的SRS符号位置。图10是根据本发明实施例的在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中不同UE配置不同的SRS传输时域符号的示意图,如图10所示,不同的UE配置不同的SRS符号位置,且不同UE执行CCA的位置地为SRS符号位置之前的一个符号,或者,前P个符号。P为大于等于1的符号,且小于下行传输burst末尾部分子帧剩余符号数减特定值。其中,特等值可以为1,2,3,4,5或者,下行burst末尾部分子帧中SRS的符号数目。Here, the remaining symbols in the following row transmission burst are taken as an example to illustrate that different UEs are configured with different SRS symbol positions in the remaining symbols in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of different SRS transmission time domain symbols configured by different UEs in a downlink subframe of a downlink transmission burst according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10, different UEs configure different SRS symbol positions, and different UEs. The location where the CCA is executed is a symbol before the SRS symbol position, or the first P symbols. P is a symbol greater than or equal to 1, and is smaller than the number of remaining symbols of the sub-frame at the end of the downlink transmission burst minus a specific value. The special value may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or the number of symbols of the SRS in the subframe at the end of the downlink burst.
其中,不同UE配置不同的SRS符号位置,在一实施方式中,不同SRS 符号位置的不同UE可以配置不同的传输梳齿,和/或,循环移位,或者,配置相同的传输梳齿,和/或,循环移位。同一SRS符号位置内的不同UE可以配置不同的传输梳齿,或,循环移位。循环移位,和/或,传输梳齿可以由高层RRC信令配置,和/或,物理层DCI信令配置。其中,循环移位取值范围[0~7],或者,[0,s1],传输梳齿取值范围为[0,1],或者,[0,3],或者,[0,s2]。其中,s1为大于等于7的正整数。s2为大于等于3的正整数。不同UE配置的不同的SRS符号位置可以由实施例1和实施例2中的配置SRS符号位置的方法。Where different UEs configure different SRS symbol positions, in one embodiment, different SRSs Different UEs of symbol locations may be configured with different transmission combs, and/or, cyclically shifted, or configured with the same transmission combs, and/or cyclically shifted. Different UEs within the same SRS symbol location may be configured with different transmission combs, or cyclic shifts. The cyclic shift, and/or the transmission comb can be configured by higher layer RRC signaling, and/or physical layer DCI signaling. Among them, the cyclic shift value range [0~7], or [0, s1], the transmission comb tooth value range is [0, 1], or, [0, 3], or, [0, s2] . Where s1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 7. S2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3. The different SRS symbol positions of different UE configurations may be the method of configuring SRS symbol positions in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2.
情况3:对于不同的UE配置相同的候选SRS符号位置情况,UE传输SRS的方法。Case 3: A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for the case where different UEs are configured with the same candidate SRS symbol position.
对于情况3,不同的UE配置相同的候选SRS符号位置,其中,候选的SRS符号位置可以是时域上连续的,也可以时域上离散的多个符号组成。For case 3, different UEs are configured with the same candidate SRS symbol position, wherein the candidate SRS symbol positions may be continuous in the time domain or may be composed of multiple symbols discrete in the time domain.
不同UE配置的相同的SRS符号位置与实施例1和实施例2中的配置SRS符号位置的方法相同。The same SRS symbol positions for different UE configurations are the same as those for configuring SRS symbol positions in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2.
其中,在候选的SRS符号位置中,可以在同一个SRS符号位置不同的UE配置不同的传输梳齿,和/或,循环移位。这样一来,当多个UE中至少之一在候选的SRS符号位置之前执行CCA失败时,在下一个SRS符号位置之前成功,并在当前SRS符号上传输,也不会造成资源碰撞。在一实施方式中,在候选的SRS符号位置中之一UE成功的传输SRS,其他候选的SRS符号,该UE可以继续执行LBT并发送SRS,或者,不发送SRS。或者,不执行LBT直接发送SRS。Wherein, in the candidate SRS symbol positions, different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts may be configured in UEs with different SRS symbol positions. In this way, when at least one of the plurality of UEs performs a CCA failure before the candidate SRS symbol position, it succeeds before the next SRS symbol position and transmits on the current SRS symbol, and does not cause a resource collision. In an embodiment, one of the candidate SRS symbol positions successfully transmits the SRS, and the other candidate SRS symbols, the UE may continue to perform the LBT and transmit the SRS, or may not transmit the SRS. Alternatively, the SRS is sent directly without performing LBT.
候选的SRS符号位置可以为时域上离散的。例如,UE配置的候选的SRS传输符号位置为13,11,9。CCA的位置为符号9之前,符号10,符号12。若UE1在符号9之前执行LBT成功,则UE在符号9上传输SRS。若UE1在符号11上要继续传输SRS时,UE1在符号10内的操作有两种:一种,UE在符号10内发送特定资源上发送预留信号或占用信号。另一种,UE在符号10内执行LBT。LBT可以为LBT CaT4,最小竞争窗0或,1,最大竞争窗5,defer period中n为0,或,1。或者,LBT可以为Cat2LBT。特定资源为特定的RE或RB或RBG或子带。即UE1在特定的资源上发送 占用信号或预留信号,频域上除了特定资源外的资源上预留空白。例如,UE1在符号10内执行的LBT可以与在符号9之前执行的LBT机制相同,或者,可以更加简化的LBT,或者,更短的竞争窗。或者,Cat2LBT,且CCA时长为25us。若在符号11上传输SRS成功,其候选的SRS符号位置传输方法同上。另一种是,若UE1在符号9之前执行LBT成功,则UE在符号9上传输SRS。候选的符号11,13上UE1可以不发送SRS。The candidate SRS symbol locations may be discrete in the time domain. For example, the candidate SRS transmission symbol positions configured by the UE are 13, 11, 9. The position of the CCA is before the symbol 9, the symbol 10, and the symbol 12. If UE1 performs LBT success before symbol 9, the UE transmits SRS on symbol 9. If UE1 wants to continue transmitting SRS on symbol 11, UE1 operates in symbol 10 in two ways: First, the UE transmits a reservation signal or an occupancy signal on a specific resource transmitted in symbol 10. Alternatively, the UE performs LBT within symbol 10. The LBT may be LBT CaT4, the minimum contention window 0 or 1, the maximum contention window 5, and n is 0, or 1, in the defer period. Alternatively, the LBT can be a Cat2LBT. A specific resource is a specific RE or RB or RBG or subband. That is, UE1 sends on a specific resource. Occupancy signal or reserved signal, blank in the frequency domain except for specific resources. For example, the LBT performed by UE1 within symbol 10 may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed prior to symbol 9, or may be a more simplified LBT, or a shorter contention window. Or, Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us. If the SRS is successfully transmitted on the symbol 11, its candidate SRS symbol position transmission method is the same as above. Alternatively, if UE1 performs LBT success before symbol 9, the UE transmits SRS on symbol 9. UE1 may not transmit SRS on candidate symbols 11, 13.
若UE1在符号9之前执行LBT失败,在继续在符号10,或者,符号11之前继续执行LBT,其中,在符号10,或者,符号11之前执行的LBT机制可以与符号9之前执行的LBT机制相同,或者,比符号9之前执行的LBT机制更加简化,或者,更短的竞争窗,或者,Cat2LBT,且CCA时长为25us。即,在UE在当前的SRS符号位置之前执行LBT失败,在下一个SRS符号位置执行的LBT机制可以与前一个SRS符号执行LBT机制相同,或,更加短的竞争窗,或者,更加简化的LBT机制,如,Cat2LBT,且CCA时长为25us。候选的SRS符号位置发送SRS所执行的LBT方法依次类推采用上述相同的方法。If UE1 fails to perform LBT before symbol 9, continue to execute LBT before proceeding to symbol 10, or symbol 11, wherein the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 10, or symbol 11, may be the same as the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 9 Or, it is more simplified than the LBT mechanism performed before symbol 9, or a shorter contention window, or Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us. That is, if the UE performs an LBT failure before the current SRS symbol position, the LBT mechanism performed at the next SRS symbol position may be the same as the previous SRS symbol performing the LBT mechanism, or a shorter contention window, or a more simplified LBT mechanism. For example, Cat2LBT, and the CCA duration is 25us. The LBT method performed by the candidate SRS symbol position transmitting SRS is analogously the same method as described above.
情况4:对于不同的UE配置不同的候选SRS符号位置情况,UE传输SRS的方法。Case 4: A method in which the UE transmits an SRS for different UEs to configure different candidate SRS symbol position cases.
与情况3不同的是,对于情况4,不同UE配置的候选SRS符号位置可以出现重叠,或者,可以部分重叠,或者,不重叠。Different from Case 3, for Case 4, candidate SRS symbol positions of different UE configurations may overlap, or may overlap partially, or may not overlap.
对于不同UE配置的候选SRS符号位置出现部分重叠时,在部分重叠的SRS符号位置不同UE配置不同的传输梳齿,或者,循环移位。不重叠的SRS符号位置不同的UE可以配置相同的传输梳齿,或者,相同的循环移位,或者,不同的传输梳齿,或者,不同的循环移位。When there is partial overlap of candidate SRS symbol positions for different UE configurations, different UEs configure different transmission combs or cyclic shifts in partially overlapping SRS symbol positions. UEs with different overlapping SRS symbol positions may be configured with the same transmission comb, or the same cyclic shift, or different transmission combs, or different cyclic shifts.
此外,若一个UE传输SRS的符号位置与另一个UE执行CCA符号位置在同一个符号时,可以采用CCA频域图样的方式避免SRS传输位置与CCA执行位置碰撞,即,将SRS的传输梳齿中之一预留用于其他UE进行CCA检测。也就是说,在一个符号内,SRS和CCA通过频分方式复用。In addition, if the symbol position of one UE transmitting the SRS is the same symbol as the position of the CCA symbol performed by another UE, the CSA frequency domain pattern can be used to avoid the collision between the SRS transmission position and the CCA execution position, that is, the transmission of the SRS is combed. One of them is reserved for other UEs for CCA detection. That is to say, within one symbol, SRS and CCA are multiplexed by frequency division.
实施例4 Example 4
提供一种“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”在同一上行子帧中同时传输避免SRS的LBT和PUSCH传输之间阻塞的方法。A method of "SRS without PUSCH", "SRS with PUSCH" and "PUSCH" simultaneously transmitting congestion between LBT and PUSCH transmissions avoiding SRS in the same uplink subframe is provided.
若LAA中允许SRS without PUSCH在正常上行子帧中传输,此时,如果SRS符号位置依然为子帧的最后一个符号时,当“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”在同一上行子帧中同时传输时,为了满足ETSI中对于传输信号之前执行LBT的管制要求,则在配置SRS without PUSCH的子帧,基站通过物理层DCI信令通知UE空白该子帧中倒数第二个符号,倒数第二个符号用于发送SRS而执行CCA。If the SRS without PUSCH is allowed to be transmitted in the normal uplink subframe in the LAA, if the SRS symbol position is still the last symbol of the subframe, when "SRS without PUSCH", "SRS with PUSCH" and "PUSCH" are in the same In the case of simultaneous transmission in the uplink subframe, in order to meet the regulatory requirements for performing LBT before the transmission signal in the ETSI, the base station configures the subframe of the SRS without PUSCH, and the base station informs the UE of the blank to the penultimate of the subframe by the physical layer DCI signaling. The symbol, the second to last symbol, is used to send the SRS to perform CCA.
另一种方式,在配置SRS without PUSCH的子帧中,修改已有的SRS符号位置,即从子帧中的最后一个符号修改为子帧中第一个符号(“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”的CCA位置为传输“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”子帧中的前一子帧的最后一个符号),或者,第二个符号(“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”的CCA位置为传输“SRS without PUSCH”,“SRS with PUSCH”和“PUSCH”子帧中的第一个符号)。Alternatively, in the subframe in which the SRS without PUSCH is configured, the existing SRS symbol position is modified, that is, the last symbol in the subframe is modified to the first symbol in the subframe ("SRS without PUSCH", "SRS" The CCA position of "with PUSCH" and "PUSCH" is the transmission "SRS without PUSCH", the "SRS with PUSCH" and the last symbol of the previous subframe in the "PUSCH" subframe), or the second symbol ("SRS" Without PUSCH", the CCA position of "SRS with PUSCH" and "PUSCH" is the transmission "SRS without PUSCH", the "SRS with PUSCH" and the first symbol in the "PUSCH" subframe).
新的SRS符号位置,可以通过物理层DCI信令通知给UE,或者,传输SRS without PUSCH的子帧位置隐含确定SRS符号位置。其中,传输SRS without PUSCH的子帧位置可以是小区级共享的。的物理层DCI信令,包括:UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令);或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C);或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A);或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令。The new SRS symbol position may be notified to the UE through physical layer DCI signaling, or the subframe position in which the SRS without PUSCH is transmitted implicitly determines the SRS symbol position. The subframe position for transmitting the SRS without PUSCH may be shared at the cell level. Physical layer DCI signaling, including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling (eg, format 3) /3A); or, DL grant (for example, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
实施例5Example 5
本实施例是基于LAA系统中支持宽带SRS,提供一种在SRS带宽配置参数CSRS≥2时,满足ETSI中关于带宽的管制要求的解决方法。This embodiment is based on the support of wideband SRS in the LAA system, and provides a solution to meet the bandwidth requirements of the ETSI when the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS ≥ 2.
其中,ETSI中对于带宽的管制要求为:传输设备在非授权载波上进行传输的带宽至少占总带宽的80%。Among them, the bandwidth requirement in ETSI is that the transmission device transmits at least 80% of the total bandwidth on the unlicensed carrier.
对于SRS,在非授权载波上的传输带宽也同样必须满足ETSI中关于带宽的管制要求。在LTE协议中,仅有SRS带宽配置参数CSRS为0,1,2满足 ETSI中的传输带宽占总带宽的至少80%的管制要求。但当SRS带宽配置参数CSRS大于2所对应的SRS传输带宽不满足ETSI中关于带宽的管制要求。For SRS, the transmission bandwidth on the unlicensed carrier must also meet the bandwidth requirements in ETSI. In the LTE protocol, only the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS is 0, 1, 2 meets the regulatory requirements that the transmission bandwidth in the ETSI accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth. However, when the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS is greater than 2, the SRS transmission bandwidth does not satisfy the bandwidth requirement in the ETSI.
基于此,对于SRS带宽配置参数CSRS大于2时,满足传输带宽占用总带宽至少80%要求的方法如下:Based on this, when the SRS bandwidth configuration parameter C SRS is greater than 2, the method for satisfying the requirement that the total bandwidth of the transmission bandwidth is at least 80% is as follows:
方法一:频域上重复N的方法。Method 1: The method of repeating N in the frequency domain.
根据Bsrs和Csrs确定SRS的带宽,从而确定频域上重复的次数,或者,重复次数由高层RRC或者物理层DCI信令通知。例如,BSRS=0,CSRS=6确定的SRS传输带宽为48个PRB(physical resource block,物理资源块),则对应频域上重复的次数为2。图11是根据本发明实施例的频域重复N满足ETSI管制带宽要求的示意图,如图11所示。The bandwidth of the SRS is determined according to B srs and C srs to determine the number of repetitions in the frequency domain, or the number of repetitions is signaled by the higher layer RRC or physical layer DCI. For example, B SRS =0, and the SRS transmission bandwidth determined by C SRS = 6 is 48 PRBs (physical resource blocks), and the number of repetitions in the corresponding frequency domain is 2. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a frequency domain repetition N satisfying an ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirement according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG.
根据高层RRC信令或物理层DCI信令配置的频域起点,开始映射SRS序列。若在不足80%带宽的资源上重复映射SRS序列。The SRS sequence is started to be mapped according to the frequency domain starting point configured by the high layer RRC signaling or the physical layer DCI signaling. If the SRS sequence is repeatedly mapped on resources with less than 80% bandwidth.
方法二:增加SRS序列的长度,直到管制中规定的至少80%的对应的带宽。Method 2: Increase the length of the SRS sequence until at least 80% of the corresponding bandwidth specified in the regulation.
方法三:增大传输梳齿Comb的方法。即建立传输梳齿Comb与SRS传输带宽之间的对应关系。Method 3: Increase the method of transmitting comb Comb. That is, the correspondence between the transmission comb Comb and the SRS transmission bandwidth is established.
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2017084176-appb-000036
其中,传输梳齿Comb可以为2,4,6,8,12等。The transmission comb Comb may be 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, and the like.
方法四:修改子载波间隔。例如,根据不同SRS带宽对应不同的子载波间隔。Method 4: Modify the subcarrier spacing. For example, different subcarrier spacings are corresponding according to different SRS bandwidths.
即假定子载波间隔为r,对应SRS带宽=r*12*Msrs>=80%系统带宽。其中,Msrs为SRS带宽对应的PRB。That is, the subcarrier spacing is assumed to be r, and the corresponding SRS bandwidth = r * 12 * Msrs > = 80% system bandwidth. The Msrs is a PRB corresponding to the SRS bandwidth.
方法五:利用频域跳频方式满足一段时间内名义带宽满足总带宽的至少80%的管制要求。频域跳频方式与已有LTE技术总体相同,不同之处在于,跳频的时域间隔从子帧级修改为符号级。即在下行burst末尾部分子帧 中剩余符号,或者,候选的SRS时域符号位置,或者,配置的SRS独立传输子帧中,SRS频域跳频是按照符号依次跳频。Method 5: Use the frequency domain frequency hopping method to meet the regulatory requirements that the nominal bandwidth meets at least 80% of the total bandwidth over a period of time. The frequency domain frequency hopping mode is generally the same as the existing LTE technology, except that the time domain interval of the frequency hopping is changed from the subframe level to the symbol level. That is, at the end of the downlink burst, a partial subframe The remaining symbols, or the candidate SRS time domain symbol positions, or, in the configured SRS independent transmission subframe, the SRS frequency domain frequency hopping is frequency hopping in accordance with the symbols.
方法六:利用RB交织的方式。Method 6: Using the RB interleaving method.
例如,Bsrs=0,Csrs配置为6或7,其SRS带宽对应的RB为48。则可以通过内插RB的方法,即根据频域起点,按照96mod2(2为RB的间隔)为0或1对应的资源上映射SRS,但每个PRB内按照原来的comb映射。For example, Bsrs=0, Csrs is configured to be 6 or 7, and the RB corresponding to the SRS bandwidth is 48. Then, the SRS may be mapped by the method of interpolating the RB, that is, according to the frequency domain starting point, the resources corresponding to the modb are mapped according to 96 mod2 (the interval of 2 is the RB), but each PRB is mapped according to the original comb.
方法七:采用块交织的方式。Method 7: Use block interleaving.
例如,Bsrs=0,Csrs配置为3,其SRS带宽对应的RB为72。簇的个数可以是2,3,4,6,8,9,12,24,对应的簇内RB数目分别为36,24,18,12,9,6,3。图12是根据本发明实施例的利用块交织方式满足ETSI管制带宽要求的示意图,如图12所示。For example, Bsrs=0, Csrs is configured to be 3, and the RB corresponding to the SRS bandwidth is 72. The number of clusters may be 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 24, and the number of corresponding intra-cluster RBs is 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6, and 3, respectively. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of satisfying ETSI regulatory bandwidth requirements by using a block interleaving method, as shown in FIG. 12, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
实施例6Example 6
本实施例提供一种多子帧调度场景下,处理用户设备UE传输信号不连续的方法。This embodiment provides a method for processing a discontinuity of a signal transmitted by a user equipment UE in a multi-subframe scheduling scenario.
对于PUSCH从子帧中符号索引为1开始进行传输情况,子帧中空白的符号为子帧中符号索引0。和/或,PUSCH从子帧中符号索引0开始进行传输,PUSCH结束符号索引为12,或者,11情况,子帧中空白符号为子帧中符号索引为13,或者,12和13。For the case where the PUSCH starts transmission from the symbol index of the subframe, the symbol of the blank in the subframe is the symbol index 0 in the subframe. And/or, the PUSCH starts to transmit from the symbol index 0 in the subframe, and the PUSCH end symbol index is 12, or 11, in the case of a blank symbol in the subframe, the symbol index in the subframe is 13, or 12 and 13.
PUSCH开始符号位置,或,结束符号位置,和/或,LBT执行的符号位置可以由基站通过物理层DCI信令配置给UE。The PUSCH start symbol position, or the end symbol position, and/or the LBT performed symbol position may be configured by the base station to the UE through physical layer DCI signaling.
基于此,当UE1在连续的多个子帧上被调度,例如,子帧#n,子帧#n+1,且在子帧中进行PUSCH传输的起点为符号0,结束位置为符号12情况下,UE在子帧#n,和子帧#n+1上进行PUSCH传输时,出现传输信号不连续现象,因为在子帧#n的最后一个符号上UE没有进行信号传输。对于多子帧调度场景中子帧中空白符号为符号0情况也同样会出现在前后子帧间出现传输信号不连续现象。Based on this, when UE1 is scheduled on consecutive multiple subframes, for example, subframe #n, subframe #n+1, and the starting point of PUSCH transmission in the subframe is symbol 0, and the end position is symbol 12 When the UE performs PUSCH transmission on the subframe #n and the subframe #n+1, a transmission signal discontinuity occurs because the UE does not perform signal transmission on the last symbol of the subframe #n. For the case where the blank symbol in the subframe in the multi-subframe scheduling scenario is the symbol 0, the transmission signal discontinuity occurs between the preceding and succeeding sub-frames.
避免多子帧中出现的信号不连续的方法如下:The way to avoid signal discontinuities in multiple sub-frames is as follows:
方法一:隐含指示UE在前后子帧间的空白符号处执行LBT。LBT可以 采用25us的Cat2LBT机制,或者,类似DRS的LBT机制,或者,随机选择CCA起点的Cat2LBT机制,或者,采用最小竞争窗为0,最大竞争窗为5,defer period中n为0,或1的Cat4LBT机制。其中,defer period是由固定CCA时长加上n个slot。slot为9us,固定CCA时长为16us。Method 1: implicitly instructing the UE to perform LBT at the blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes. LBT can Use a 25us Cat2LBT mechanism, or a DRS-like LBT mechanism, or a Cat2LBT mechanism that randomly selects the CCA starting point, or a minimum contention window of 0, a maximum contention window of 5, a deter period where n is 0, or a Cat4LBT of 1 mechanism. Among them, the defer period is determined by the fixed CCA duration plus n slots. The slot is 9us and the fixed CCA is 16us.
方法二:通过物理层DCI信令明确指示在前后子帧间的空白符号处执行LBT。其中,物理层DCI信令中可以指示PUSCH传输开始的符号位置,和/或,PUSCH传输结束符号位置,和/或,子帧中空白符号位置,和/或,LBT机制,和/或,LBT机制对应的参数,如,最大竞争窗和最小竞争窗值,随机回退值,defer period中n值,CCA duration时长,CCA duration起点。Method 2: explicitly indicate that the LBT is performed at the blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes through the physical layer DCI signaling. The physical layer DCI signaling may indicate a symbol position at which PUSCH transmission starts, and/or a PUSCH transmission end symbol position, and/or a blank symbol position in a subframe, and/or an LBT mechanism, and/or an LBT. The parameters corresponding to the mechanism, such as the maximum contention window and the minimum contention window value, the random backoff value, the n value in the defer period, the CCA duration duration, and the CCA duration starting point.
方法三:UE在前后子帧间的空白符号处发送稀疏的预留信号或占用信号。稀疏的预留信号或占用信号是指预留信号或占用信号仅在特定的频域资源(RE(Resource Element,资源单元)或RB(Resource Block,资源块)或RBG(Resource Block Group,资源块组)或子带)上发送。空白符号内除了特定的频域资源外的部分或全部频域资源可以用于其他UE执行CCA,在CCA成功的情况下进行PUSCH传输和/或SRS发送。其中,用于执行CCA的频域空白资源位置和/或时域符号位置可以由基站通过物理层DCI信令动态通知给UE。Method 3: The UE sends a sparse reserved signal or an occupied signal at a blank symbol between the preceding and succeeding subframes. A sparse reserved signal or occupied signal means that the reserved signal or the occupied signal is only in a specific frequency domain resource (RE (Resource Element) or RB (Resource Block) or RBG (Resource Block Group). Send on group) or subband). Some or all of the frequency domain resources except for a specific frequency domain resource in the blank symbol may be used for other UEs to perform CCA, and PUSCH transmission and/or SRS transmission may be performed if the CCA is successful. The frequency domain blank resource location and/or the time domain symbol location used to perform CCA may be dynamically notified to the UE by the base station through physical layer DCI signaling.
物理层DCI信令,包括:UE专有DCI信令(例如,format 0/4信令);或者,公共DCI信令(例如,format 1C);或者,group DCI信令(例如,format 3/3A);或者,DL grant(例如,format 1A/2B/2C)信令。Physical layer DCI signaling, including: UE-specific DCI signaling (eg, format 0/4 signaling); or, common DCI signaling (eg, format 1C); or, group DCI signaling (eg, format 3/) 3A); or, DL grant (eg, format 1A/2B/2C) signaling.
实施例7Example 7
本实施例主要提供周期SRS和非周期SRS的传输方法。This embodiment mainly provides a method for transmitting periodic SRS and aperiodic SRS.
SRS传输的周期和偏移量参数在由高层RRC信令配置的情况下,由于上行或下行buffer状态,LAA执行的机会性下行或上行传输,从而使得传输信号出现不连续现象。基于此,可以只有当UE在SRS周期点之前执行LBT成功,且该SRS周期点上有PUSCH时,UE才能在SRS周期点上进行SRS传输。还可以只有当UE在SRS周期点之前执行LBT成功,UE就可以在SRS周期点上进行SRS传输。还可以即使UE在SRS周期点之前执行LBT 成功,也不能在SRS周期点上进行SRS传输,只有在收到物理层DCI信令触发之后才能在SRS的周期点上尝试进行SRS传输,其中,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输可以是触发UE进行一次SRS传输,或者,N次SRS传输。即在物理层DCI信令中增加触发SRS传输字段,和/或,增加指示SRS传输次数字段。N为大于等于1的正整数。例如,N为1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8。进一步地,UE在SRS的周期点上尝试进行SRS传输是指在SRS的周期点之前执行LBT成功,才可以在SRS周期点上进行传输。反之,若在SRS周期点之前执行LBT失败,则不能在SRS周期点上进行传输。When the period and offset parameters of the SRS transmission are configured by the upper layer RRC signaling, the LAA performs opportunistic downlink or uplink transmission due to the uplink or downlink buffer state, thereby causing a discontinuity in the transmission signal. Based on this, the UE can perform SRS transmission at the SRS periodic point only when the UE performs the LBT successfully before the SRS periodic point and the PUSCH is present at the SRS periodic point. It is also possible that the UE can perform SRS transmission at the SRS periodic point only when the UE performs LBT success before the SRS cycle point. It is also possible to perform LBT even before the SRS cycle point of the UE. If the SRS transmission is successful, the SRS transmission cannot be performed at the SRS periodic point. The SRS transmission can be attempted at the SRS periodic point only after the physical layer DCI signaling is triggered. The physical layer DCI signaling triggering the SRS transmission may trigger the UE. Perform an SRS transmission, or N times SRS transmission. That is, the trigger SRS transmission field is added in the physical layer DCI signaling, and/or the field indicating the SRS transmission number is added. N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. For example, N is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. Further, the UE attempting to perform SRS transmission at the periodic point of the SRS means that the LBT is successfully executed before the periodic point of the SRS, and the transmission can be performed at the SRS periodic point. Conversely, if the LBT failure is performed before the SRS cycle point, the transmission cannot be performed at the SRS cycle point.
SRS传输的时域子帧位置,除了可以通过高层RRC信令配置之外,还可以通过物理层DCI信令配置。其中,通过物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的子帧位置或候选的SRS传输子帧位置,可以通过以下之一方式:The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission can be configured through physical layer DCI signaling in addition to the high layer RRC signaling configuration. The subframe position of the SRS transmission or the location of the candidate SRS transmission subframe configured by the physical layer DCI signaling may be adopted by one of the following methods:
方式一:在物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示SRS传输的子帧位置或候选的SRS传输子帧位置的字段。UE通过接收到DCI信令,即可知道传输SRS的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置。Manner 1: The physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for indicating a subframe position of the SRS transmission or a candidate SRS transmission subframe position. The UE can know the time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS or the candidate time domain subframe position by receiving the DCI signaling.
方式二:物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示特定定时关系值k的字段。通过特定定时关系值可以确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置。例如,物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,通过接收到DCI信令以及携带的特定定时关系值,确定n+k对应的子帧为SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置。其中,k可以为大于等于0的值,也可以为大于等于4的值,k为0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8。Manner 2: The physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a specific timing relationship value k. The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position may be determined by a specific timing relationship value. For example, the physical layer DCI signaling is sent on the subframe n, and the subframe corresponding to the n+k is determined as the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the time domain of the candidate by receiving the DCI signaling and the specific timing relationship value carried. Subframe position. Where k may be a value greater than or equal to 0, or may be a value greater than or equal to 4, and k is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
方式三:高层RRC信令配置的周期和偏移量,仅在UE收到基站发送的物理层DCI信令时高层RRC信令配置的周期和偏移量对应的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置中至少之一生效,或,可用。其中,物理层DCI信令中可以携带指示SRS在候选的时域子帧中进行一次传输,或,多次传输的指示信息。Manner 3: The period and the offset of the high-layer RRC signaling configuration, only when the UE receives the physical layer DCI signaling sent by the base station, the period of the high-layer RRC signaling configuration and the time-domain subframe position or candidate corresponding to the offset At least one of the domain subframe positions is valid, or, available. The physical layer DCI signaling may carry indication information indicating that the SRS performs one transmission in the candidate time domain subframe, or multiple transmissions.
此外,SRS传输的子帧位置或候选的SRS传输子帧位置可以通过隐含的方式确定,例如,收到公共DCI信令,即可知道SRS可以在上行传输burst中第一个子帧,或者,传输burst中子帧索引对应的偶数子帧或奇数子帧上进行传输(即可以通过通过子帧引号对应或上行传输burst长度内子帧 号mod p得到的0,1,2,…p-1中之一对应的子帧为SRS时域子帧或候选的SRS时域子帧),或者,DRS子帧,或者,下行末尾部分子帧。其中,在SRS时域子帧或候选的时域子帧中哪个符号或候选的那些时域符号上进行SRS传输也可以通过物理层DCI信令通知,或,高层RRC信令配置,或,基站和UE事先预定,或,预定义方式确定。其中,确定SRS时域符号或候选时域符号位置的DCI信令,和,确定SRS时域子帧位置或候选SRS时域子帧位置的信令,和,触发SRS传输的信令可以是同一个DCI信令,或者,不同的DCI信令。In addition, the subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate SRS transmission subframe position may be determined in an implicit manner. For example, when receiving the common DCI signaling, the SRS may be known to be the first subframe in the uplink transmission burst, or And transmitting the even subframe or the odd subframe corresponding to the subframe index in the transmission burst (that is, the subframe within the burst length may be correspondingly transmitted through the subframe quotation mark or uplink) The subframe corresponding to one of 0, 1, 2, ..., p-1 obtained by mod p is an SRS time domain subframe or a candidate SRS time domain subframe), or, a DRS subframe, or a downlink tail portion frame. The SRS transmission on the SRS time domain subframe or the candidate time domain subframes of the symbols or candidate time domain symbols may also be notified by physical layer DCI signaling, or the upper layer RRC signaling configuration, or the base station And the UE pre-determined, or, in a predefined manner. Wherein, the DCI signaling for determining the SRS time domain symbol or the candidate time domain symbol position, and the signaling for determining the SRS time domain subframe position or the candidate SRS time domain subframe position, and the signaling for triggering the SRS transmission may be the same One DCI signaling, or different DCI signaling.
在一实施方式中,触发SRS传输的信令可以复用已有协议中的DCI format 0/4/1A/2B/2C/2D,其中,对于SRS与PUSCH情况,触发SRS传输可以采用DCI format 0/4。而对于SRS不与PUSCH情况,触发SRS传输可以采用DCI format 2B/2C/2D之外,还可以采用DCI format 1C,或,DCI format 3/3A。其中,对于DCI format 1C,可以利用预留比特来指示触发SRS传输。对于DCI format 3/3A,可以新增用于指示触发SRS传输的字段。基于此,在DCI format中也新增SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧字段,和/或,新增SRS传输的时域符号或候选的时域符号字段,和/或,新增触发SRS进行单次传输或多次传输的字段,和/或,新增定时关系值k。In an embodiment, the signaling for triggering the SRS transmission may multiplex the DCI format 0/4/1A/2B/2C/2D in the existing protocol, where for the SRS and the PUSCH, the trigger SRS transmission may adopt the DCI format 0. /4. For the case where the SRS is not related to the PUSCH, the triggering SRS transmission may be performed by using DCI format 2B/2C/2D, or DCI format 1C, or DCI format 3/3A. Wherein, for DCI format 1C, reserved bits may be utilized to indicate triggering SRS transmission. For DCI format 3/3A, a field can be added to indicate the triggering of the SRS transmission. Based on this, a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe field of the SRS transmission is also added in the DCI format, and/or a time domain symbol of the SRS transmission or a candidate time domain symbol field is added, and/or , adding a field that triggers SRS to perform single transmission or multiple transmissions, and/or, adds a timing relationship value k.
对于非周期SRS传输,触发非周期SRS传输的信令除了触发SRS传输,在一实施方式中,可以携带触发UE进行一次SRS传输,或者,N次SRS传输。此外,非周期SRS传输的时域位置除了高层RRC配置的SRS周期点之外,还可以通过物理层DCI信令动态指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选的时域子帧位置。For aperiodic SRS transmission, the signaling that triggers the aperiodic SRS transmission triggers the SRS transmission. In an implementation manner, the UE may be triggered to perform one SRS transmission, or N times SRS transmission. In addition, the time domain location of the aperiodic SRS transmission may dynamically indicate the time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position through physical layer DCI signaling, in addition to the SRS periodic point configured by the upper layer RRC.
在候选的时域子帧位置上是否可以进行SRS传输,取决于物理层DCI信令触发和/或LBT结果。DCI信令触发是指触发SRS进行传输,和/或,触发UE在候选的时域子帧是进行一次SRS传输,或是,可以进行多次SRS传输。Whether SRS transmission is possible at the candidate time domain subframe position depends on the physical layer DCI signaling trigger and/or LBT result. The DCI signaling triggering refers to triggering the SRS to transmit, and/or triggering the UE to perform an SRS transmission in a candidate time domain subframe, or may perform multiple SRS transmissions.
即在候选的SRS时域子帧位置上,如果UE在其中一个候选的时域子帧之前执行LBT成功,就可以在该候选的时域子帧位置上进行SRS传输。或 者,That is, at the candidate SRS time domain subframe position, if the UE performs LBT success before one of the candidate time domain subframes, SRS transmission can be performed on the candidate time domain subframe position. Or By,
如果UE在其中一个候选的时域子帧之前执行LBT成功,但没有收到基站发送的DCI信令,即便UE已经执行LBT成功,也不能在该时域子帧上进行SRS传输。或者,If the UE performs LBT successfully before one of the candidate time domain subframes, but does not receive the DCI signaling sent by the base station, the SRS transmission cannot be performed on the time domain subframe even if the UE has successfully performed the LBT. or,
如果UE在其中一个候选的时域子帧之前执行LBT成功,且收到基站发送的DCI信令,则根据DCI信令中指示的进行一次SRS传输,还是,多次SRS传输信息,在候选的多个SRS时域子帧位置上进行SRS传输。If the UE performs LBT successfully before one of the candidate time domain subframes, and receives DCI signaling sent by the base station, performs an SRS transmission according to the indication in the DCI signaling, or multiple times, the SRS transmission information is in the candidate. SRS transmission is performed on multiple SRS time domain subframe positions.
其中,如果候选的多个SRS传输时域位置在时域上是连续的,则一旦UE在其中一个SRS传输时域位置之前执行LBT成功,即可在后续的候选SRS时域位置上直接进行SRS发送,而无需执行LBT。而如果候选的多个SRS传输时域位置在时域上是离散的,则一旦UE在其中一个SRS传输时域位置之前执行LBT成功,即仅能在当前SRS时域位置上进行传输。若要在后续的候选SRS时域位置上进行传输,需要进行如下之一操作:一是执行LBT机制。二是发送稀疏的预留信号或占用信号。稀疏的预留信号或占用信号是指仅在总带宽上特定的频域资源上发送预留信号或占用信号,其余频域资源空置或预留。这样做的原因在于,在前后SRS时域位置之间该UE传输的信号是不连续,从而可能导致在前后SRS时域位置之间的空白符号或子帧处丢失信道的使用权,基于此,在前后SRS时域位置之间的空白符号或子帧处,UE要么需要发送占用信号,要么需要执行LBT。Wherein, if the candidate multiple SRS transmission time domain locations are consecutive in the time domain, once the UE performs LBT success before one of the SRS transmission time domain locations, the SRS can be directly performed on the subsequent candidate SRS time domain locations. Send without having to perform LBT. And if the candidate multiple SRS transmission time domain locations are discrete in the time domain, once the UE performs LBT success before one of the SRS transmission time domain locations, that is, only the current SRS time domain location can be transmitted. To perform transmission on the subsequent candidate SRS time domain location, one of the following operations is required: First, the LBT mechanism is implemented. The second is to send a sparse reserved signal or occupy signal. A sparse reserved signal or occupied signal means that the reserved signal or the occupied signal is transmitted only on a specific frequency domain resource on the total bandwidth, and the remaining frequency domain resources are vacant or reserved. The reason for this is that the signals transmitted by the UE between the front and rear SRS time domain locations are discontinuous, which may result in loss of use of the channel at blank symbols or subframes between the front and rear SRS time domain locations, based on which, At blank symbols or subframes between the front and back SRS time domain locations, the UE either needs to transmit an occupancy signal or needs to perform LBT.
这里的在多个候选的时域子帧上进行SRS传输的处理方法,也同样适用于在多个候选的时域符号位置上进行SRS传输的情况。Here, the processing method of performing SRS transmission on a plurality of candidate time domain subframes is also applicable to the case of performing SRS transmission on a plurality of candidate time domain symbol positions.
其中,SRS传输的时域子帧可以是下行末尾部分子帧,或者,DRS子帧,或者,上行传输burst中上行子帧,或者,上行传输burst中第一个子帧中至少之一。进一步地,下行末尾部分子帧中剩余符号上进行SRS传输的时域符号位置可以通过物理层DCI信令配置,和/或,高层RRC信令配置,和/或,根据剩余符号数目隐含确定,和/或,基站和UE事先约定方式获取。而对于SRS在DRS子帧中传输是指,SRS可以在DRS子帧中剩余的两个符号中至少之一上进行传输。The time domain subframe of the SRS transmission may be a downlink end subframe, or a DRS subframe, or an uplink subframe in an uplink transmission burst, or at least one of the first subframe in an uplink transmission burst. Further, the time domain symbol position for performing SRS transmission on the remaining symbols in the downlink end subframe may be configured by physical layer DCI signaling, and/or, high layer RRC signaling configuration, and/or implicitly determined according to the remaining number of symbols. And/or, the base station and the UE acquire in advance by way of agreement. And transmitting the SRS in the DRS subframe means that the SRS can transmit on at least one of the remaining two symbols in the DRS subframe.
物理层DCI信令包括:UE专有DCI(例如,DCI format 0/4)或者,DL  grant(例如,DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D)或者,common DCI(例如,DCI format 1C)或者,group DCI(例如,DCI format 3/3A),即在物理层DCI信令中至少之一中增加SRS子帧字段,和/或,SRS触发字段,和/或,SRS符号字段,和/或,定时关系值,和/或,不同符号数目与SRS传输时域符号位置对应关系表格中索引指示字段。Physical layer DCI signaling includes: UE-specific DCI (eg, DCI format 0/4) or, DL Grant (for example, DCI format 1A/2B/2C/2D) or common DCI (for example, DCI format 1C) or group DCI (for example, DCI format 3/3A), that is, at least one of physical layer DCI signaling. Adding an SRS subframe field, and/or an SRS trigger field, and/or an SRS symbol field, and/or a timing relationship value, and/or an index of a table of different symbol numbers and SRS transmission time domain symbol position correspondence table Indicates the field.
需要说明的是,上述实施例或实施例,不仅限于应用在下行传输末尾部分子帧情况,也可以用于上行传输末尾部分子帧,或者,上行传输开始部分子帧,或者,上行完整子帧,或者,下行完整子帧情况,或者,其他场景(例如,LAA,SDL(Standalone Downlink,独立下行),SUL(Standalone Uplinke,独立上行),LAA DC(Double Connection,双连接),NB-IOT(Narrow Band Internet of Things,基于蜂窝的窄带物联网),MTC(Machine type communication,机器类型通讯)等场景),或者,其他情况。It should be noted that the foregoing embodiment or the embodiment is not limited to the application of the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission, and may also be used for the uplink transmission end subframe, or the uplink transmission start partial subframe, or the uplink complete subframe. , or, downlink complete subframe condition, or other scenarios (for example, LAA, SDL (Standalone Downlink), SUL (Standalone Uplinke), LAA DC (Double Connection), NB-IOT ( Narrow Band Internet of Things, cellular-based narrowband Internet of Things, MTC (Machine type communication), or other situations.
通过上述实施例及实施方式,在一定程度上实现了下行末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号较多情况下的SRS传输。同时,也增加了SRS传输机会,提高了SRS容量。此外,也使得宽带SRS中特定配置满足ETSI中关于带宽的管制要求。Through the foregoing embodiments and implementation manners, SRS transmission in the case where there are many remaining symbols in the downlink end subframe is realized to a certain extent. At the same time, SRS transmission opportunities have also been increased, and SRS capacity has been increased. In addition, the specific configuration in the wideband SRS also satisfies the regulatory requirements for bandwidth in ETSI.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到根据上述实施例的方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例的方法。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the method according to the above embodiment can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course, by hardware, but in many cases, the former is A better implementation. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium (such as a ROM/RAM, a magnetic disk, an optical disk), and includes a plurality of instructions for making a terminal. The device (which may be a cell phone, computer, server, or network device, etc.) performs the methods of various embodiments of the present invention.
装置实施例Device embodiment
在本实施例中还提供了一种信号传输装置及用户设备,该装置用于实现上述实施例及实施方式,已经进行过说明的不再赘述。如以下所使用的,术语“模块”可以实现预定功能的软件和/或硬件的组合。尽管以下实施例所描述的装置可以以软件来实现,但是硬件,或者软件和硬件的组合的 实现也是可能并被构想的。In the embodiment, a signal transmission device and a user equipment are also provided, which are used to implement the foregoing embodiments and implementation manners, and are not described again. As used below, the term "module" may implement a combination of software and/or hardware of a predetermined function. Although the apparatus described in the following embodiments may be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware Implementation is also possible and conceived.
图13是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图一,如图13所示,该装置包括第一确定模块132和第一传输模块134,下面对该装置进行说明。FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 13, the apparatus includes a first determination module 132 and a first transmission module 134, which will be described below.
第一确定模块132,设置为确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;第一传输模块134,连接至上述第一确定模块132,设置为在确定的符号位置上传输SRS;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置。a first determining module 132, configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; the first transmission module 134, coupled to the first determining module 132, configured to transmit an SRS at the determined symbol position; wherein The symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position.
在一实施方式中,所述第一确定模块,设置为根据如下方式至少之一,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置:In an embodiment, the first determining module is configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS according to at least one of the following manners:
根据符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系的方式;a manner according to a predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol;
采用信令明确指示的方式;Adopting a clear indication of signaling;
隐含约定的方式。Implied convention.
在一实施方式中,符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系包括如下对应关系至少之一:索引号与不同符号数目及符号位置之间的对应关系;在预定的符号数目下,索引号与符号位置之间的对应关系。In an embodiment, the predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol includes at least one of the following: a correspondence between the index number and a different number of symbols and a symbol position; and a predetermined number of symbols, the index number and the symbol The correspondence between the locations.
图14是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置中第一确定模块132的结构框图一,如图14所示,该第一确定模块132包括:第一确定单元142,下面对该第一确定单元142进行说明。FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the structure of the first determining module 132 in the signal transmission apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 14, the first determining module 132 includes: a first determining unit 142, and the first determining is performed below. Unit 142 is described.
第一确定单元142,设置为根据获取的索引号,确定用于传输SRS的符号位置。The first determining unit 142 is configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the acquired index number.
图15是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置中第一确定模块132的结构框图二,如图15所示,该第一确定模块132包括:第一获取单元152,下面对该第一获取单元152进行说明。FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the structure of the first determining module 132 in the signal transmission apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 15, the first determining module 132 includes: a first acquiring unit 152, and the first obtaining is performed below. Unit 152 is described.
第一获取单元152,设置为通过以下方式至少之一,获取索引号:通过高层无线链路控制RRC信令的方式;通过物理层下行控制信息DCI信令的方式;通过基站和用户设备UE事先约定的方式;其中,在RRC信令,或者物理层DCI信令中增加用于指示索引号的字段。 The first obtaining unit 152 is configured to obtain an index number by using at least one of the following manners: a manner of controlling RRC signaling by a high-layer radio link, a method of controlling downlink information by a physical layer downlink, and a method of using a base station and a user equipment UE in advance The agreed manner; wherein a field for indicating an index number is added in RRC signaling or physical layer DCI signaling.
在一实施方式中,信令明确指示的方式中,明确指示用于传输SRS的符号位置的信令包括如下信令至少之一:高层RRC信令;物理层DCI信令,其中,信令中包括用于指示SRS传输的符号位置的字段。In an embodiment, in a manner that the signaling is explicitly indicated, the signaling that explicitly indicates the symbol location for transmitting the SRS includes at least one of the following signaling: high layer RRC signaling; physical layer DCI signaling, where signaling A field is included for indicating the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
在一实施方式中,高层RRC信令配置SRS传输时域位置或候选的时域位置,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置一经配置立即生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置,在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧或上行传输burst中生效。In an embodiment, the high-layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high-layer RRC signaling or the candidate time domain location takes effect; or, the upper layer The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the RRC signaling is configured as soon as it is configured; or the SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is at the end of the downlink transmission burst or the uplink transmission. Effective in burst.
在一实施方式中,物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示用于SRS传输的符号位置字段;或者,第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的符号位置。In an embodiment, the physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating SRS transmission; or the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers SRS transmission, and the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling. Symbol location.
在一实施方式中,第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,包括:第一物理层DCI信令中携带用于触发SRS传输的字段,其中,触发SRS传输的字段包括:触发一次SRS传输,或者,多次SRS传输。In an embodiment, the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, including: the first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering the SRS transmission, where the field triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering an SRS transmission, Or, multiple SRS transmissions.
在一实施方式中,通过隐含约定的方式确定用于传输SRS的符号位置,包括以下至少之一:根据下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数目确定用于传输SRS的符号位置;先听后说LBT机制执行成功的时刻确定用于传输SRS的符号位置;基站和UE事先约定的方式确定用于传输SRS的符号位置。In an embodiment, the symbol position for transmitting the SRS is determined by implicitly agreeing, including at least one of: determining a symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end portion of the downlink transmission burst; The moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed is determined to determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS; the base station and the UE determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS in a manner agreed in advance.
图16是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图二,如图16所示,该装置除包括图13所示的所有模块外,还包括:第二确定模块172,下面对该第二确定模块172进行说明。16 is a block diagram showing the structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 16, the apparatus includes, in addition to all the modules shown in FIG. 13, a second determining module 172, which is described below. The second determination module 172 is described.
第二确定模块172,连接至上述第一确定模块132,设置为通过以下方式至少之一,确定用于传输SRS的符号位置所属的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置:通过高层RRC信令配置的方式;通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式;通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式;通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,其中,N为大于等于1的整数;通过隐含约定 的方式;通过基站和UE事先约定的方式。The second determining module 172 is connected to the foregoing first determining module 132, and is configured to determine, by at least one of the following manners, a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs: by using a higher layer RRC The mode of signaling configuration; the mode of configuration by physical layer DCI signaling; the combination of high-layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling; and the combination of N physical layer DCI signaling, where N is greater than or equal to An integer of 1; by implicit convention The way; through the way agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
在一实施方式中,该第二确定模块172,设置为通过高层RRC信令配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,包括:通过高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;或者,高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,一经配置立即生效;或者,高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,在上行传输burst期间生效;其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an embodiment, the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using a high layer RRC signaling configuration, including: configuring, by using high layer RRC signaling, for SRS transmission. The parameters determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position; or, the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the high layer RRC signaling are effective once configured; or the parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling During the uplink transmission burst, the parameters for the SRS transmission include at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, SRS transmission Time window, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window start position, one transmission, multiple transmission.
在一实施方式中,该第二确定模块172,设置为通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照预定定时关系,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;在物理层DCI信令中携带指示时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置。In an embodiment, the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using physical layer DCI signaling configuration, including at least one of the following: a physical medium that triggers SRS transmission. The layer DCI signaling is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship. The physical layer DCI signaling carries the indication time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe. The field of the location determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
在一实施方式中,该第二确定模块172,设置为通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数生效;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令配置高层RRC信令未配置的SRS传输的参数;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令中携带指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据字段确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和/或按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;其中,用于SRS传输的参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时 间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an embodiment, the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by using a combination of high layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling, including at least one of the following: : high-level RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, physical layer DCI signaling triggers high-level RRC signaling configuration parameters for SRS transmission to take effect; high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission The physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the SRS transmission that are not configured by the high-layer RRC signaling; the high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling carries the time domain indicating the SRS transmission. a field of a subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position, determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to the field; and configuring, by the high layer RRC signaling, at least one of parameters of the SRS transmission Physical layer DCI signaling triggers SRS transmission and/or determines a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship; wherein parameters for SRS transmission include at least one of the following : period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, offset within time window, time Inter-window interval, the starting position of the SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmissions.
在一实施方式中,该第二确定模块172,还设置为通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,确定时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令,按照预定定时关系确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,和/或,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置使能。In an embodiment, the second determining module 172 is further configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position by combining the N times physical layer DCI signaling, including at least one of the following: The physical layer DCI signaling configures the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission, and enables the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration by using the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or The second physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission; the SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling; The physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission according to the predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling; the first physical layer DCI signaling according to the predetermined timing The relationship determines a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS, triggers SRS transmission by the second physical layer DCI signaling, and/or triggers the first physical layer DCI signaling by using the second physical layer DCI signaling Determine the time domain subframe bit of the SRS transmission Or a time-domain subframe position candidate is enabled.
在一实施方式中,预定定时关系包括:n+k;或者,n+k1;其中,n为触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧号;k为大于等于4的正整数;k1为大于等于0的正整数。In an embodiment, the predetermined timing relationship includes: n+k; or, n+k1; wherein n is a subframe number of physical layer DCI signaling that triggers SRS transmission; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 Is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
在一实施方式中,k或k1可以通过以下方式至少之一获取:高层RRC信令配置;物理层DCI信令指示;基站和UE事先约定方式。In an embodiment, k or k1 may be obtained by at least one of the following: a high-level RRC signaling configuration; a physical layer DCI signaling indication; and a base station and a UE pre-agreed mode.
在一实施方式中,物理层DCI信令包括以下之一:UE专有DCI信令,采用DCI format 0/4;公共DCI信令,采用DCI format 1C;组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,采用DCI format 3/3A;下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,采用DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;新DCI信令。In an embodiment, the physical layer DCI signaling includes one of the following: UE-specific DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4; common DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C; group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, adopting DCI format 3/3A; downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C; new DCI signaling.
在一实施方式中,该第二确定模块172,设置为通过隐含约定的方式,确定SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:下行传输burst结束之后使能高层RRC信令配置的SRS参数或物理层DCI信令明确指示的SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置;下行传输burst之后的末尾部分子帧;下行传输burst之后,第一个上行子帧;下行传输burst之后,第二个上行子帧;下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行 子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;上行传输burst中第一个上行子帧;上行传输burst中第二个上行子帧;上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;其中,SRS参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。In an embodiment, the second determining module 172 is configured to determine a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by using an implicit agreement, including at least one of the following: after the downlink transmission burst ends The SRS parameter configured in the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling; the last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst; after the downlink transmission burst The first uplink subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe; after the downlink transmission burst, the uplink transmission burst is uplinked The subframe index is an odd-numbered subframe; the first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst; the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe; the uplink transmission burst The intermediate uplink subframe index is an odd-numbered subframe; wherein the SRS parameter includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, a symbol index of the LBT, a time domain pattern of the SRS transmission, and an SRS transmission. Time window, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window start position, one transmission, multiple transmission.
在一实施方式中,用于指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置信息,和,用于指示SRS传输的符号位置信息在同一个物理层DCI信令中,或者,在不同的物理层DCI信令中。In an embodiment, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position information used to indicate the SRS transmission, and the symbol location information used to indicate the SRS transmission are in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or Different physical layer DCI signaling.
在一实施方式中,上述第一传输模块134,设置为在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS,包括:不同的用户设备UE在相同的一个时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在不同的时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在相同的候选时域符号位置传输;不同的UE在不同的候选时域符号位置传输。In an embodiment, the foregoing first transmission module 134 is configured to transmit the SRS on the determined symbol position, including: different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same one time domain symbol position; different UEs are different. Time domain symbol position transmission; different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position; different UEs are transmitted in different candidate time domain symbol positions.
在一实施方式中,不同的UE在相同的符号位置上传输的情况下,通过不同传输梳齿和/或循环移位方式复用。In an embodiment, different UEs are multiplexed by different transmission combs and/or cyclic shifts in the case of transmissions at the same symbol position.
在一实施方式中,不同的UE在相同或不同的候选时域符号位置传输包括:在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输SRS成功的情况下,停止在候选时域符号位置中除预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输SRS;或者,在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输SRS成功的情况下,继续在候选时域符号位置中除预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输SRS。In an embodiment, transmitting, by the different UEs in the same or different candidate time domain symbol positions comprises: stopping the candidate time domain symbol positions in a case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS is successful in the candidate time domain symbol positions Transmitting SRS in other time domain symbol positions than the predetermined time domain symbol position; or, in the case where a predetermined time domain symbol position transmission SRS in the candidate time domain symbol position is successful, continuing to be excluded in the candidate time domain symbol position The SRS is transmitted at other time domain symbol locations than the predetermined time domain symbol location.
图17是根据本发明实施例的信号传输装置的结构框图三,如图17所示,该装置除包括图13所示的所有模块外,还包括:执行模块182,下面对该执行模块182进行说明。17 is a block diagram 3 of a structure of a signal transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 17, the apparatus includes, in addition to all the modules shown in FIG. 13, an execution module 182, and the execution module 182. Be explained.
执行模块182,连接至上述第一传输模块134,设置为在不同的UE在相同或不同的符号位置传输之前,执行先听后说LBT机制,在执行LBT机制成功的情况下,所述第一传输模块在所述符号位置上传输SRS。The execution module 182 is connected to the first transmission module 134, and is configured to perform an LBT mechanism after the different UEs transmit in the same or different symbol positions. In the case that the LBT mechanism is successful, the first The transmission module transmits the SRS at the symbol location.
在一实施方式中,所述符号位置为候选时域符号位置时,所述执行模 块设置为::对于不同候选时域符号位置采用相同或不同的LBT机制,其中,采用不同的LBT机制时,在前一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制比后一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制简化,或者有更短的竞争窗。In an embodiment, when the symbol position is a candidate time domain symbol position, the execution mode The block is set to: use the same or different LBT mechanisms for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein when different LBT mechanisms are used, the LBT mechanism performed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is later than the latter candidate time domain symbol position The previously implemented LBT mechanism is simplified, or there is a shorter competition window.
在一实施方式中,所述装置还包括:满足模块,设置为通过以下方式至少之一,满足SRS传输带宽占总带宽至少80%的管制要求:通过重复SRS所占带宽预定次数N的方式,通过增加SRS序列的长度的方式,通过增大传输梳齿的方式,通过修改子载波间隔的方式,通过频域跳频的方式,通过资源块交织的方式,通过块交织的方式。In an embodiment, the apparatus further includes: a satisfying module, configured to meet at least one of the following manners, satisfying a regulatory requirement that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth: by repeating the manner in which the SRS occupies a predetermined number of times of bandwidth N, By increasing the length of the SRS sequence, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, by modifying the subcarrier spacing, by means of frequency domain hopping, by means of resource block interleaving, by means of block interleaving.
图18是根据本发明实施例的用户设备UE 10的结构框图,如图18所示,该UE 10包括上述任一项的信号传输装置192。FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a user equipment UE 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 18, the UE 10 includes the signal transmission device 192 of any of the above.
需要说明的是,上述各个模块是可以通过软件或硬件来实现的,对于后者,可以通过以下方式实现,但不限于此:上述模块均位于同一处理器中;或者,上述各个模块以任意组合的形式分别位于不同的处理器中。It should be noted that each of the above modules may be implemented by software or hardware. For the latter, the foregoing may be implemented by, but not limited to, the foregoing modules are all located in the same processor; or, the above modules are in any combination. The forms are located in different processors.
本发明的实施例还提供了一种存储介质。在一实施方式中,在本实施例中,上述存储介质可以被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤的程序代码:Embodiments of the present invention also provide a storage medium. In an embodiment, in the embodiment, the storage medium may be configured to store program code for performing the following steps:
S1,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置;S1, determining a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position;
S2,在确定的符号位置上传输SRS。S2, transmitting the SRS at the determined symbol position.
在本实施例中,上述存储介质可以包括但不限于:U盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。In this embodiment, the foregoing storage medium may include, but not limited to, a U disk, a Read-Only Memory (ROM), a Random Access Memory (RAM), a mobile hard disk, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk. A variety of media that can store program code.
在本实施例中,处理器根据存储介质中已存储的程序代码执行上述实施例记载的方法步骤。In this embodiment, the processor executes the method steps described in the above embodiments according to the program code stored in the storage medium.
本实施例中的示例可以参考上述实施例及实施方式中所描述的示例,本实施例在此不再赘述。For examples in this embodiment, reference may be made to the examples described in the foregoing embodiments and implementation manners, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,本发明实施例的信号传输方法、装置及用户设备,不 仅适用于非授权载波场景,还可适用于授权载波及其他类型载波的场景。It should be noted that the signal transmission method, apparatus, and user equipment of the embodiments of the present invention are not Applicable only to unlicensed carrier scenarios. It can also be applied to scenarios where licensed carriers and other types of carriers are used.
上述的本发明实施例的各模块或各步骤可以用通用的计算装置来实现,它们可以集中在单个的计算装置上,或者分布在多个计算装置所组成的网络上,它们可以用计算装置可执行的程序代码来实现,从而,可以将它们存储在存储装置中由计算装置来执行,并且在某些情况下,可以以不同于此处的顺序执行所示出或描述的步骤,或者将它们分别制作成各个集成电路模块,或者将它们中的多个模块或步骤制作成单个集成电路模块来实现。这样,本申请不限制于任何特定的硬件和软件结合。The modules or steps of the above embodiments of the present invention may be implemented by a general-purpose computing device, which may be centralized on a single computing device or distributed over a network of multiple computing devices, which may be implemented by computing devices. The executed program code is implemented such that they can be stored in a storage device by a computing device, and in some cases, the steps shown or described can be performed in a different order than here, or they can be Each of the integrated circuit modules is fabricated separately, or a plurality of modules or steps thereof are fabricated into a single integrated circuit module. Thus, the application is not limited to any particular combination of hardware and software.
以上所述仅为本发明的实施例而已,并不用于限制本申请,对于本领域的技术人员来说,本申请可以有各种更改和变化。凡在本申请的精神和原则之内,所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。The above description is only for the embodiments of the present invention, and is not intended to limit the present application, and various changes and modifications may be made by those skilled in the art. Any modifications, equivalent substitutions, improvements, etc. made within the spirit and principles of this application are intended to be included within the scope of the present application.
工业实用性Industrial applicability
通过本发明实施例,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置,达到有效提高SRS的传输机会的效果。 Through the embodiment of the present invention, the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined, and the effect of effectively improving the transmission opportunity of the SRS is achieved.

Claims (54)

  1. 一种信号传输方法,包括:A signal transmission method includes:
    确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置;Determining a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position;
    在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS。The SRS is transmitted at the determined symbol position.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,根据如下方式至少之一,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置:The method of claim 1, wherein the symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS is determined according to at least one of:
    根据符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系的方式;a manner according to a predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol;
    采用信令明确指示的方式;Adopting a clear indication of signaling;
    隐含约定的方式。Implied convention.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述符号数目与符号位置之间所述预定对应关系包括如下对应关系至少之一:The method of claim 2, wherein the predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the symbol position comprises at least one of the following correspondences:
    索引号与不同符号数目及符号位置之间的对应关系;The correspondence between the index number and the number of different symbols and the position of the symbol;
    在预定的符号数目下,索引号与符号位置之间的对应关系。The correspondence between the index number and the symbol position under a predetermined number of symbols.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,确定所述用于传输所述SRS的所述符号位置包括:The method of claim 3, wherein determining the symbol location for transmitting the SRS comprises:
    根据获取的索引号,确定用于传输所述SRS的所述符号位置。The symbol position for transmitting the SRS is determined according to the acquired index number.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,通过以下方式至少之一,获取所述索引号:The method of claim 4, wherein the index number is obtained by at least one of:
    通过高层无线链路控制RRC信令的方式;A method of controlling RRC signaling through a high-level radio link;
    通过物理层下行控制信息DCI信令的方式;The method of downlink information control information DCI signaling through the physical layer;
    通过基站和用户设备UE事先约定的方式;a manner agreed in advance by the base station and the user equipment UE;
    其中,在所述RRC信令,或者所述物理层DCI信令中增加用于指示索引号的字段。The field for indicating the index number is added to the RRC signaling or the physical layer DCI signaling.
  6. 根据权利要求2中所述的方法,其中,所述信令明确指示的方式中,明确指示用于传输所述SRS的符号位置的信令包括如下信令至少之一: The method according to claim 2, wherein in the manner in which the signaling is explicitly indicated, the signaling explicitly indicating the symbol location for transmitting the SRS comprises at least one of the following signaling:
    高层RRC信令;High-level RRC signaling;
    物理层DCI信令,Physical layer DCI signaling,
    其中,所述信令中包括用于指示SRS传输的符号位置的字段。Wherein, the signaling includes a field for indicating a symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  7. 根据权利要求6中所述的方法,其中,所述采用信令明确指示的方式包括:The method of claim 6 wherein said means for explicitly indicating by signaling comprises:
    高层RRC信令配置SRS传输时域位置或候选的时域位置,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置生效;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high layer RRC signaling or the candidate time domain location takes effect; or
    高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置一经配置立即生效;或者,The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is configured as soon as it is configured; or
    高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置,在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧或上行传输burst中生效。The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is valid in the downlink subframe or the uplink transmission burst.
  8. 根据权利要求6中所述的方法,其中,所述采用信令明确指示的方式包括:The method of claim 6 wherein said means for explicitly indicating by signaling comprises:
    物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示用于SRS传输的符号位置字段;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating SRS transmission; or
    第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的符号位置。The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the second physical layer DCI signaling indicates the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  9. 根据权利要求8中所述的方法,其中,所述第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers an SRS transmission, including:
    第一物理层DCI信令中携带用于触发SRS传输的字段,其中,所述触发SRS传输的字段包括:触发一次SRS传输,或者,多次SRS传输。The first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering SRS transmission, where the field for triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering one SRS transmission, or multiple SRS transmission.
  10. 根据权利要求2中所述的方法,其中,通过所述隐含约定的方式确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置,包括以下至少之一:The method of claim 2, wherein the symbol location for transmitting the SRS is determined by the implicit convention, including at least one of the following:
    根据下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数目确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置;Determining, according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, a symbol position for transmitting the SRS;
    先听后说LBT机制执行成功的时刻确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置;Listening to the moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed determines the symbol position for transmitting the SRS;
    基站和UE事先约定的方式确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置。The symbol location for transmitting the SRS is determined in a manner agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,所述方法还包括:通过 以下方式至少之一,确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置所属的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置:A method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, the method further comprising: passing At least one of the following manners: determining a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs:
    通过高层RRC信令配置的方式;The way of configuring by high-level RRC signaling;
    通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式;The way of configuring through physical layer DCI signaling;
    通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式;A combination of high-level RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling;
    通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,其中,N为大于等于1的整数;A method of combining N times physical layer DCI signaling, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
    通过隐含约定的方式;By implicit agreement;
    通过基站和UE事先约定的方式。The way agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  12. 根据权利要求11中所述的方法,其中,所述通过高层RRC信令配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the determining, by the high layer RRC signaling configuration, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position comprises:
    通过高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;或者,Determining, by the high layer RRC signaling, parameters for SRS transmission to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position; or
    高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,一经配置立即生效;或者,The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are effective immediately upon configuration; or,
    高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,在上行传输burst期间生效;The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst;
    其中,用于SRS传输的所述参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。The parameter for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window Internal offset, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,所述通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 11, wherein the determining, by the physical layer DCI signaling configuration, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position comprises at least one of the following:
    触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照预定定时关系,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship;
    在物理层DCI信令中携带指示所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据所述字段确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置。 The physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position, and determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
  14. 根据权利要求11中所述的方法,其中,所述通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 11, wherein the determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position comprises at least the following by way of high layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling combined configuration one:
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数生效;The high-layer RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, and the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the physical layer DCI signaling triggering the high-layer RRC signaling are valid;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令配置高层RRC信令未配置的SRS传输的参数;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the unconfigured SRS transmission of the upper layer RRC signaling;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令中携带指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据所述字段确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters for the SRS transmission, where the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, according to the field Determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship. Frame position
    其中,用于SRS传输的所述参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。The parameter for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window Internal offset, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  15. 根据权利要求11中所述的方法,其中,通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 11, wherein the determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position comprises at least one of the following: by combining N times physical layer DCI signaling:
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息; The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;Configuring the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling to trigger the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息和触发SRS传输;Configuring the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling, enabling the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration and triggering the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令,按照预定定时关系确定SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, and triggering the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过所述第二物理层DCI信令触发所述第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置使能;Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, and triggering the first physical layer by using the second physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission determined by the DCI signaling or the candidate time domain subframe position is enabled;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和触发所述第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置使能。Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, triggering the SRS transmission and triggering the first by the second physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission determined by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled.
  16. 根据权利要求13至15中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述预定定时关系包括:The method of any of claims 13 to 15, wherein the predetermined timing relationship comprises:
    n+k;或者,n+k; or,
    n+k1;n+k1;
    其中,n为触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧号;k为大于等于4的正整数;k1为大于等于0的正整数。Where n is the subframe number sent by the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
  17. 根据权利要求16中所述的方法,其中,所述k或k1通过以下方式至少之一获取: The method of claim 16 wherein said k or k1 is obtained by at least one of:
    高层RRC信令配置;物理层DCI信令指示;基站和UE事先约定方式。High-level RRC signaling configuration; physical layer DCI signaling indication; base station and UE agreed in advance.
  18. 根据权利要求4,6,7,8,9,11,13,14,15中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述物理层DCI信令包括以下之一:The method of any of claims 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15 wherein the physical layer DCI signaling comprises one of the following:
    UE专有DCI信令,采用DCI format 0/4;UE proprietary DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4;
    公共DCI信令,采用DCI format 1C;Public DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C;
    组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,采用DCI format 3/3A;Group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, using DCI format 3/3A;
    下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,采用DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;Downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;
    新DCI信令。New DCI signaling.
  19. 根据权利要求11中所述的方法,其中,所述通过隐含约定的方式,确定SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 11, wherein the determining, by implicit agreement, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission comprises at least one of the following:
    下行传输burst结束之后,使能高层RRC信令配置的SRS参数或物理层DCI信令明确指示的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;After the downlink transmission burst ends, the SRS parameter configured by the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled;
    下行传输burst之后的末尾部分子帧;The last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst;
    下行传输burst之后,第一个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the first uplink subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,第二个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe;
    上行传输burst中第一个上行子帧;The first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
    上行传输burst中第二个上行子帧;The second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
    上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
    上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe;
    其中,所述SRS参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多 次传输。The SRS parameter includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, a symbol index of the LBT, a time domain pattern of the SRS transmission, a time window of the SRS transmission, and an offset within the time window. , time window interval, starting position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, more Secondary transmission.
  20. 根据权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 11 to 19, wherein
    用于指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置信息,和,用于指示SRS传输的符号位置信息在同一个物理层DCI信令中,或者,在不同的物理层DCI信令中。a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position information for indicating SRS transmission, and symbol position information for indicating SRS transmission in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or a DCI signal at a different physical layer Order.
  21. 根据权利要求1至20中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS包括以下至少之一:The method of any one of claims 1 to 20, wherein said transmitting said SRS at said determined symbol position comprises at least one of:
    不同的用户设备UE在相同的一个时域符号位置传输;Different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same time domain symbol position;
    不同的UE在不同的时域符号位置传输;Different UEs are transmitted in different time domain symbol locations;
    不同的UE在相同的候选时域符号位置传输;Different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position;
    不同的UE在不同的候选时域符号位置传输。Different UEs are transmitted at different candidate time domain symbol locations.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其中,不同的UE在相同的时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置上传输的情况下,通过如下方式至少之一复用:不同传输梳齿方式复用、循环移位方式复用。The method according to claim 21, wherein, in the case that different UEs are transmitted on the same time domain symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position, at least one of multiplexing is performed by: different transmission comb mode multiplexing, Cyclic shift mode multiplexing.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其中,不同的UE在相同或不同的候选时域符号位置传输包括:The method of claim 21 wherein the transmitting of the same or different candidate time domain symbol locations by different UEs comprises:
    在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输所述SRS成功的情况下,停止在所述候选时域符号位置中除所述预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输所述SRS;或者,Stopping other time domain symbol position transmissions other than the predetermined time domain symbol position in the candidate time domain symbol position if a predetermined time domain symbol position in the candidate time domain symbol position transmits the SRS successfully The SRS; or,
    在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输所述SRS成功的情况下,继续在所述候选时域符号位置中除所述预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输所述SRS。And transmitting, in the candidate time domain symbol position, other time domain symbol position transmissions other than the predetermined time domain symbol position, in a case where the predetermined time domain symbol position of the candidate time domain symbol position transmits the SRS successfully The SRS.
  24. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其中,不同的UE在相同或不同的符号位置传输之前,还包括:The method of claim 21, wherein before the different UEs transmit at the same or different symbol locations, the method further comprises:
    执行先听后说LBT机制,在执行所述LBT机制成功的情况下,在所述符号位置上传输所述SRS。The LBT mechanism is executed after listening, and the SRS is transmitted at the symbol position if the LBT mechanism is successfully executed.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其中,所述符号位置为候选时域符号 位置时,执行所述LBT机制包括:The method of claim 24 wherein said symbol location is a candidate time domain symbol In the case of location, the execution of the LBT mechanism includes:
    对于不同候选时域符号位置采用相同或不同的LBT机制,其中,采用不同的LBT机制时,在前一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制比后一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制简化,或者有更短的竞争窗。The same or different LBT mechanisms are used for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein the LBT mechanism executed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is earlier than the LBT mechanism performed before the latter candidate time domain symbol position when different LBT mechanisms are used Simplify, or have a shorter competition window.
  26. 根据权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法,还包括:The method of any one of claims 1 to 25, further comprising:
    通过以下方式至少之一,满足SRS传输带宽占总带宽至少80%的管制要求:At least one of the following methods satisfies the regulatory requirements that the SRS transmission bandwidth accounts for at least 80% of the total bandwidth:
    通过重复所述SRS所占带宽预定次数N的方式,通过增加SRS序列的长度的方式,通过增大传输梳齿的方式,通过修改子载波间隔的方式,通过频域跳频的方式,通过资源块交织的方式,通过块交织的方式。By repeating the manner in which the SRS occupies a predetermined number of times of the bandwidth N, by increasing the length of the SRS sequence, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, by modifying the subcarrier spacing, the frequency domain frequency hopping method is used to pass the resource. The way of block interleaving is done by block interleaving.
  27. 一种信号传输装置,包括:A signal transmission device comprising:
    第一确定模块,设置为确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置;其中,所述符号位置为时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置;a first determining module, configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS; wherein the symbol position is a time domain symbol position or a candidate time domain symbol position;
    第一传输模块,设置为在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS。a first transmission module configured to transmit the SRS at the determined symbol location.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定模块,设置为根据如下方式至少之一,确定用于传输探测参考信号SRS的符号位置:The apparatus of claim 27, wherein the first determining module is configured to determine a symbol position for transmitting the sounding reference signal SRS according to at least one of:
    根据符号数目与符号位置之间预定对应关系的方式;a manner according to a predetermined correspondence between the number of symbols and the position of the symbol;
    采用信令明确指示的方式;Adopting a clear indication of signaling;
    隐含约定的方式。Implied convention.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其中,所述符号数目与符号位置之间所述预定对应关系包括如下对应关系至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein said predetermined correspondence between said number of symbols and said symbol position comprises at least one of the following correspondences:
    索引号与不同符号数目及符号位置之间的对应关系;The correspondence between the index number and the number of different symbols and the position of the symbol;
    在预定的符号数目下,索引号与符号位置之间的对应关系。The correspondence between the index number and the symbol position under a predetermined number of symbols.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定模块包括:The apparatus of claim 29, wherein the first determining module comprises:
    第一确定单元,设置为根据获取的索引号,确定用于传输所述SRS的所述符号位置。The first determining unit is configured to determine the symbol position for transmitting the SRS according to the acquired index number.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定模块,还包括: 第一获取单元,设置为通过以下方式至少之一,获取所述索引号:The device of claim 30, wherein the first determining module further comprises: The first obtaining unit is configured to obtain the index number by using at least one of the following manners:
    通过高层无线链路控制RRC信令的方式;A method of controlling RRC signaling through a high-level radio link;
    通过物理层下行控制信息DCI信令的方式;The method of downlink information control information DCI signaling through the physical layer;
    通过基站和用户设备UE事先约定的方式;a manner agreed in advance by the base station and the user equipment UE;
    其中,在所述RRC信令,或者所述物理层DCI信令中增加用于指示索引号的字段。The field for indicating the index number is added to the RRC signaling or the physical layer DCI signaling.
  32. 根据权利要求28中所述的装置,其中,所述信令明确指示的方式中,明确指示用于传输所述SRS的符号位置的信令包括如下信令至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein, in the manner in which the signaling is explicitly indicated, the signaling explicitly indicating the symbol location for transmitting the SRS comprises at least one of the following signaling:
    高层RRC信令;High-level RRC signaling;
    物理层DCI信令,Physical layer DCI signaling,
    其中,所述信令中包括用于指示SRS传输的符号位置的字段。Wherein, the signaling includes a field for indicating a symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  33. 根据权利要求32中所述的装置,其中,The device according to claim 32, wherein
    高层RRC信令配置SRS传输时域位置或候选的时域位置,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置生效;或者,The upper layer RRC signaling configures the SRS transmission time domain location or the candidate time domain location, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS time domain location configured by the high layer RRC signaling or the candidate time domain location takes effect; or
    高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置一经配置立即生效;或者,The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is configured as soon as it is configured; or
    高层RRC信令配置的SRS时域位置或候选的时域位置,在下行传输burst末尾部分子帧或上行传输burst中生效。The SRS time domain location or the candidate time domain location configured by the upper layer RRC signaling is valid in the downlink subframe or the uplink transmission burst.
  34. 根据权利要求32中所述的装置,其中,The device according to claim 32, wherein
    物理层DCI信令中携带用于指示用于SRS传输的符号位置字段;或者,Physical layer DCI signaling carries a symbol location field for indicating SRS transmission; or
    第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的符号位置。The first physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and the second physical layer DCI signaling indicates the symbol position of the SRS transmission.
  35. 根据权利要求34中所述的装置,其中,所述第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,包括:The apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the first physical layer DCI signaling triggers an SRS transmission, including:
    第一物理层DCI信令中携带用于触发SRS传输的字段,其中,所述触发SRS传输的字段包括:触发一次SRS传输,或者,多次SRS传输。 The first physical layer DCI signaling carries a field for triggering SRS transmission, where the field for triggering the SRS transmission includes: triggering one SRS transmission, or multiple SRS transmission.
  36. 根据权利要求28中所述的装置,其中,通过所述隐含约定的方式确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置,包括以下至少之一:The apparatus of claim 28, wherein the symbol location for transmitting the SRS is determined by the implicit convention, including at least one of the following:
    根据下行传输burst末尾部分子帧中剩余的符号数目确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置;Determining, according to the number of symbols remaining in the subframe at the end of the downlink transmission burst, a symbol position for transmitting the SRS;
    先听后说LBT机制执行成功的时刻确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置;Listening to the moment when the LBT mechanism is successfully executed determines the symbol position for transmitting the SRS;
    基站和UE事先约定的方式确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置。The symbol location for transmitting the SRS is determined in a manner agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  37. 根据权利要求27至36中任一项所述的装置,其中,还包括:第二确定模块,设置为通过以下方式至少之一,确定用于传输所述SRS的符号位置所属的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置:The apparatus according to any one of claims 27 to 36, further comprising: a second determining module configured to determine a time domain subframe to which the symbol position for transmitting the SRS belongs by at least one of the following manners Location or candidate time domain subframe position:
    通过高层RRC信令配置的方式;The way of configuring by high-level RRC signaling;
    通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式;The way of configuring through physical layer DCI signaling;
    通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式;A combination of high-level RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling;
    通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,其中,N为大于等于1的整数;A method of combining N times physical layer DCI signaling, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
    通过隐含约定的方式;By implicit agreement;
    通过基站和UE事先约定的方式。The way agreed by the base station and the UE in advance.
  38. 根据权利要求37中所述的装置,其中,所述第二确定模块,设置为通过高层RRC信令配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,包括:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the second determining module is configured to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position by means of a high layer RRC signaling configuration, including:
    通过高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;或者,Determining, by the high layer RRC signaling, parameters for SRS transmission to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position; or
    高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,一经配置立即生效;或者,The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are effective immediately upon configuration; or,
    高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数,在上行传输burst期间生效;The parameters for SRS transmission configured by the upper layer RRC signaling are valid during the uplink transmission burst;
    其中,用于SRS传输的所述参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。 The parameter for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: period, offset, transmission comb, cyclic shift, symbol index of LBT, time domain pattern of SRS transmission, time window of SRS transmission, time window Internal offset, time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  39. 根据权利要求37所述的装置,其中,所述第二确定模块,设置为通过物理层DCI信令配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the second determining module is configured to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position by means of physical layer DCI signaling configuration, including the following At least one:
    触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令在子帧n上发送,按照预定定时关系,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission is sent on the subframe n, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship;
    在物理层DCI信令中携带指示所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据所述字段确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置。The physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position, and determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position according to the field.
  40. 根据权利要求37中所述的装置,其中,所述第二确定模块,设置为通过高层RRC信令和物理层DCI信令结合配置的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the second determining module is configured to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time by means of high layer RRC signaling and physical layer DCI signaling combined configuration The domain subframe position, including at least one of the following:
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数,物理层DCI信令触发高层RRC信令配置的用于SRS传输的参数生效;The high-layer RRC signaling configures parameters for SRS transmission, and the parameters for the SRS transmission configured by the physical layer DCI signaling triggering the high-layer RRC signaling are valid;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令配置高层RRC信令未配置的SRS传输的参数;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling configures parameters of the unconfigured SRS transmission of the upper layer RRC signaling;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中的至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令中携带指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置的字段,根据所述字段确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high-layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters for the SRS transmission, where the physical layer DCI signaling carries a field indicating a time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission or the candidate time domain subframe position, according to the field Determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of the parameters used for the SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, and the physical layer DCI signaling triggers determining the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship;
    高层RRC信令配置用于SRS传输的参数中至少之一参数,物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和按照预定定时关系确定用于SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The high layer RRC signaling configures at least one of parameters for SRS transmission, the physical layer DCI signaling triggers the SRS transmission, and determines the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain for SRS transmission according to a predetermined timing relationship. Frame position
    其中,用于SRS传输的所述参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量, 传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。Wherein, the parameter used for SRS transmission includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, Transmission comb, cyclic shift, LBT symbol index, SRS transmission time domain pattern, SRS transmission time window, time window offset, time window interval, SRS transmission time window starting position, one transmission, Multiple transfers.
  41. 根据权利要求37中所述的装置,其中,所述第二确定模块,设置为通过N次物理层DCI信令结合的方式,确定所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the second determining module is configured to determine the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position by combining N times physical layer DCI signaling , including at least one of the following:
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息;The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is configured by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration is enabled by the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;Configuring the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling to trigger the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令配置SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令使能第一物理层DCI信令配置的信息和触发SRS传输;Configuring the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission by the first physical layer DCI signaling, enabling the information of the first physical layer DCI signaling configuration and triggering the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令指示SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is indicated by the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输,通过第二物理层DCI信令,按照预定定时关系确定SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;The SRS transmission is triggered by the first physical layer DCI signaling, and the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission is determined according to a predetermined timing relationship by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输;Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, and triggering the SRS transmission by using the second physical layer DCI signaling;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过所述第二物理层DCI信令触发所述第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置使能;Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, and triggering the first physical layer by using the second physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission determined by the DCI signaling or the candidate time domain subframe position is enabled;
    由第一物理层DCI信令按照预定定时关系确定传输SRS的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,通过第二物理层DCI信令触发SRS传输和触发所述第一物理层DCI信令确定的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置使能。 Determining, by the first physical layer DCI signaling, the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the transmission SRS according to a predetermined timing relationship, triggering the SRS transmission and triggering the first by the second physical layer DCI signaling The time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission determined by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled.
  42. 根据权利要求39至41中任一项所述的装置,其中,所述预定定时关系包括:The apparatus of any one of claims 39 to 41, wherein the predetermined timing relationship comprises:
    n+k;或者,n+k; or,
    n+k1;n+k1;
    其中,n为触发SRS传输的物理层DCI信令发送的子帧号;k为大于等于4的正整数;k1为大于等于0的正整数。Where n is the subframe number sent by the physical layer DCI signaling that triggers the SRS transmission; k is a positive integer greater than or equal to 4; k1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 0.
  43. 根据权利要求42中所述的装置,其中,所述k或k1通过以下方式至少之一获取:The apparatus according to claim 42, wherein said k or k1 is obtained by at least one of:
    高层RRC信令配置;物理层DCI信令指示;基站和UE事先约定方式。High-level RRC signaling configuration; physical layer DCI signaling indication; base station and UE agreed in advance.
  44. 根据权利要求30,32,33,34,35,37,39,40,41中任一项所述的装置,其中,所述物理层DCI信令包括以下之一:The apparatus of any of claims 30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, wherein the physical layer DCI signaling comprises one of:
    UE专有DCI信令,采用DCI format 0/4;UE proprietary DCI signaling, using DCI format 0/4;
    公共DCI信令,采用DCI format 1C;Public DCI signaling, using DCI format 1C;
    组下行控制信息Group DCI信令,采用DCI format 3/3A;Group downlink control information Group DCI signaling, using DCI format 3/3A;
    下行链路下行控制信息DL DCI信令,采用DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;Downlink downlink control information DL DCI signaling, using DCI format 1A/2A/2B/2C;
    新DCI信令。New DCI signaling.
  45. 根据权利要求37中所述的装置,其中,所述第二确定模块,设置为通过隐含约定的方式,确定SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置,包括以下至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein said second determining module is configured to determine said time domain subframe position or said candidate time domain subframe position of said SRS transmission by implicit agreement, including At least one of the following:
    下行传输burst结束之后,使能高层RRC信令配置的SRS参数或物理层DCI信令明确指示的SRS传输的所述时域子帧位置或所述候选时域子帧位置;After the downlink transmission burst ends, the SRS parameter configured by the upper layer RRC signaling or the time domain subframe position or the candidate time domain subframe position of the SRS transmission explicitly indicated by the physical layer DCI signaling is enabled;
    下行传输burst之后的末尾部分子帧;The last partial subframe after the downlink transmission burst;
    下行传输burst之后,第一个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the first uplink subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,第二个上行子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the second uplink subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧; After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
    下行传输burst之后,上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;After the downlink transmission burst, the uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe;
    上行传输burst中第一个上行子帧;The first uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
    上行传输burst中第二个上行子帧;The second uplink subframe in the uplink transmission burst;
    上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为偶数对应的子帧;The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an even-numbered subframe;
    上行传输burst中上行子帧索引为奇数对应的子帧;The uplink subframe index in the uplink transmission burst is an odd-numbered subframe;
    其中,所述SRS参数包括以下至少之一:周期,偏移量,传输梳齿,循环移位,LBT的符号索引,SRS传输的时域图样,SRS传输的时间窗,时间窗内偏移量,时间窗内间隔,SRS传输时间窗的起始位置,一次传输,多次传输。The SRS parameter includes at least one of the following: a period, an offset, a transmission comb, a cyclic shift, a symbol index of the LBT, a time domain pattern of the SRS transmission, a time window of the SRS transmission, and an offset within the time window. , time window interval, start position of SRS transmission time window, one transmission, multiple transmission.
  46. 根据权利要求37至45中任一项所述的装置,其中,A device according to any one of claims 37 to 45, wherein
    用于指示SRS传输的时域子帧位置或候选时域子帧位置信息,和,用于指示SRS传输的符号位置信息在同一个物理层DCI信令中,或者,在不同的物理层DCI信令中。a time domain subframe position or a candidate time domain subframe position information for indicating SRS transmission, and symbol position information for indicating SRS transmission in the same physical layer DCI signaling, or a DCI signal at a different physical layer Order.
  47. 根据权利要求27至46中任一项所述的装置,其中,所述第一传输模块,设置为在确定的所述符号位置上传输所述SRS,包括:The apparatus of any one of claims 27 to 46, wherein the first transmission module is configured to transmit the SRS at the determined symbol position, comprising:
    不同的用户设备UE在相同的一个时域符号位置传输;Different user equipment UEs are transmitted in the same time domain symbol position;
    不同的UE在不同的时域符号位置传输;Different UEs are transmitted in different time domain symbol locations;
    不同的UE在相同的候选时域符号位置传输;Different UEs are transmitted in the same candidate time domain symbol position;
    不同的UE在不同的候选时域符号位置传输。Different UEs are transmitted at different candidate time domain symbol locations.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其中,不同的UE在相同的时域符号位置或候选时域符号位置上传输的情况下,通过如下方式至少之一复用:不同传输梳齿方式复用、循环移位方式复用。The apparatus according to claim 47, wherein, when different UEs are transmitted on the same time domain symbol position or candidate time domain symbol position, at least one of multiplexing is performed by: different transmission comb mode multiplexing, Cyclic shift mode multiplexing.
  49. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其中,不同的UE在相同或不同的候选时域符号位置传输包括:The apparatus of claim 47, wherein transmitting the same or different candidate time domain symbol locations by different UEs comprises:
    在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输所述SRS成功的情况下,停止在所述候选时域符号位置中除所述预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输所述SRS;或者, Stopping other time domain symbol position transmissions other than the predetermined time domain symbol position in the candidate time domain symbol position if a predetermined time domain symbol position in the candidate time domain symbol position transmits the SRS successfully The SRS; or,
    在候选时域符号位置中的一个预定时域符号位置传输所述SRS成功的情况下,继续在所述候选时域符号位置中除所述预定时域符号位置之外的其它时域符号位置传输所述SRS。And transmitting, in the candidate time domain symbol position, other time domain symbol position transmissions other than the predetermined time domain symbol position, in a case where the predetermined time domain symbol position of the candidate time domain symbol position transmits the SRS successfully The SRS.
  50. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,还包括:The apparatus of claim 47, further comprising:
    执行模块,设置为在不同的UE在相同或不同的符号位置传输之前,执行先听后说LBT机制,在执行所述LBT机制成功的情况下,所述第一传输模块在所述符号位置上传输所述SRS。An execution module, configured to perform an LBT mechanism after the different UEs transmit in the same or different symbol positions, where the first transmission module is at the symbol position if the LBT mechanism is successful Transmitting the SRS.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的装置,其中,所述符号位置为候选时域符号位置时,所述执行模块设置为::The apparatus of claim 50, wherein when the symbol position is a candidate time domain symbol position, the execution module is set to:
    对于不同候选时域符号位置采用相同或不同的LBT机制,其中,采用不同的LBT机制时,在前一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制比后一候选时域符号位置之前执行的LBT机制简化,或者有更短的竞争窗。The same or different LBT mechanisms are used for different candidate time domain symbol positions, wherein the LBT mechanism executed before the previous candidate time domain symbol position is earlier than the LBT mechanism performed before the latter candidate time domain symbol position when different LBT mechanisms are used Simplify, or have a shorter competition window.
  52. 根据权利要求27至51中任一项所述的装置,还包括:满足模块,The apparatus according to any one of claims 27 to 51, further comprising: a satisfaction module,
    设置为通过以下方式至少之一,满足SRS传输带宽占总带宽至少80%的管制要求:Set to meet the regulatory requirements for SRS transmission bandwidth to account for at least 80% of the total bandwidth in at least one of the following ways:
    通过重复所述SRS所占带宽预定次数N的方式,通过增加SRS序列的长度的方式,通过增大传输梳齿的方式,通过修改子载波间隔的方式,通过频域跳频的方式,通过资源块交织的方式,通过块交织的方式。By repeating the manner in which the SRS occupies a predetermined number of times of the bandwidth N, by increasing the length of the SRS sequence, by increasing the manner of the transmission comb, by modifying the subcarrier spacing, the frequency domain frequency hopping method is used to pass the resource. The way of block interleaving is done by block interleaving.
  53. 一种用户设备UE,包括权利要求27至52中任一项所述的装置。A user equipment UE comprising the apparatus of any one of claims 27 to 52.
  54. 一种存储介质,所述存储介质设置为存储用于执行如权利要求1至26中任一项所述信号传输方法的程序代码。 A storage medium, the storage medium being arranged to store program code for performing the signal transmission method according to any one of claims 1 to 26.
PCT/CN2017/084176 2016-05-13 2017-05-12 Signal transmission method and device, and user equipment WO2017194005A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201610322427.2 2016-05-13
CN201610322427.2A CN107370589B (en) 2016-05-13 2016-05-13 Signal transmission method and device and user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017194005A1 true WO2017194005A1 (en) 2017-11-16

Family

ID=60267639

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/084176 WO2017194005A1 (en) 2016-05-13 2017-05-12 Signal transmission method and device, and user equipment

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN107370589B (en)
WO (1) WO2017194005A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020062011A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Multi-slot scheduling on unlicensed spectrum
CN111315015A (en) * 2018-12-21 2020-06-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 Unauthorized frequency band information transmission method, terminal and network equipment
CN115208530A (en) * 2021-04-13 2022-10-18 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102345555B1 (en) * 2017-11-28 2021-12-29 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 Bandwidth partial operation for random access in RRC connected mode
CN109995483B (en) 2017-12-29 2020-09-04 华为技术有限公司 Transmission method and device of TRS section
JP6989019B2 (en) 2018-01-11 2022-01-05 富士通株式会社 Signal receivers, methods and communication systems
CN111670554B (en) * 2018-06-14 2022-06-21 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Uplink signal transmission method, terminal equipment and network equipment
CN110830214B (en) 2018-08-10 2021-02-05 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for transmitting SRS
CN112202540B (en) 2019-05-09 2022-03-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Resource allocation method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
CN111030757B (en) * 2019-12-09 2021-11-05 明格(上海)信息技术有限公司 Method, system and computer readable medium for processing ultrasonic receiving data

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101547022A (en) * 2008-03-26 2009-09-30 三星电子株式会社 Method and device for sending SRS in LTE TDD system
US20110228722A1 (en) * 2008-12-11 2011-09-22 Min Seok Noh Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal performed by relay station in wireless communication system
CN102404074A (en) * 2010-09-17 2012-04-04 电信科学技术研究院 Transmission method and equipment of non-periodic SRS (Stimulated Raman scattering) in TDD (Time Division Duplexing) system
CN102694637A (en) * 2011-03-22 2012-09-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Sending method and system for measuring reference signals under time division duplex system

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2335360B1 (en) * 2008-09-26 2017-11-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and methods for supporting transmission of sounding reference signals with multiple antennas
US8848520B2 (en) * 2010-02-10 2014-09-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Aperiodic sounding reference signal transmission method and apparatus
US9414336B2 (en) * 2010-05-12 2016-08-09 Blackberry Limited System and method for defining a burst period
CN102438312B (en) * 2010-09-29 2015-06-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Mobile communication system and CSI-RS (channel state indication reference signal) configuring method thereof
US20130286902A1 (en) * 2012-04-27 2013-10-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Flexible special subframe configuration for tdd in lte
CN104301273B (en) * 2014-08-25 2020-03-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for transmitting and receiving signal by using unauthorized carrier, base station and user equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101547022A (en) * 2008-03-26 2009-09-30 三星电子株式会社 Method and device for sending SRS in LTE TDD system
US20110228722A1 (en) * 2008-12-11 2011-09-22 Min Seok Noh Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal performed by relay station in wireless communication system
CN102404074A (en) * 2010-09-17 2012-04-04 电信科学技术研究院 Transmission method and equipment of non-periodic SRS (Stimulated Raman scattering) in TDD (Time Division Duplexing) system
CN102694637A (en) * 2011-03-22 2012-09-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Sending method and system for measuring reference signals under time division duplex system

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020062011A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Multi-slot scheduling on unlicensed spectrum
CN111315015A (en) * 2018-12-21 2020-06-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 Unauthorized frequency band information transmission method, terminal and network equipment
CN111315015B (en) * 2018-12-21 2023-10-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 Unlicensed frequency band information transmission method, terminal and network equipment
CN115208530A (en) * 2021-04-13 2022-10-18 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN107370589B (en) 2023-04-07
CN107370589A (en) 2017-11-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2017194005A1 (en) Signal transmission method and device, and user equipment
US20200305191A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving signal in communication system supporting unlicensed band
JP6860672B2 (en) Uplink information processing method and equipment
CN106453182B (en) Preamble sending method and device
WO2017167304A1 (en) Sounding reference signal transmission and reception methods, apparatus, system, and storage medium
WO2017125009A1 (en) Method and apparatus for sending sounding reference signal
US10070425B2 (en) Multi-subframe grant with scheduling of both data and control channels
US10362605B2 (en) Systems and methods for multiplexing scheduling requests in unlicensed bands
US10271325B2 (en) Channel access in listen before talk systems
CN107371274B (en) Method and device for transmitting data
WO2017117991A1 (en) Resource allocation method, device and base station
WO2020199734A1 (en) Random access signal sending method and apparatus, random access signal receiving method and apparatus, storage medium and electronic apparatus
KR102129191B1 (en) Systems and methods for multiplexing scheduling requests in unlicensed bands
CN115336374A (en) Method and apparatus for URLLC in unlicensed frequency bands
CN105991274B (en) Method, feedback information transmission method and the relevant device of data transmission
WO2017132964A1 (en) Uplink data transmission method and related device
WO2017025004A1 (en) Method and device for competing for access
JP6725660B2 (en) Multi-subframe grant with scheduling of both data and control channels
CN113747599B (en) User equipment, base station and method thereof
CN113490276B (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving information
WO2017049906A1 (en) Multiplexing sending and receiving method and device for discovery signal and physical downlink shared channel
CN109076582B (en) System and method for scheduling uplink transmissions on unlicensed radio resources
CN115052364A (en) Method and device for transmitting data
WO2023208227A1 (en) Method related to sidelink operation in unlicensed bands, user equipment, and base station
CN117676886A (en) Communication method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17795623

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17795623

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1